Fujitsu MHV2100AT User Manual

C141-E218-01EN  
MHV2120AT, MHV2100AT, MHV2080AT  
MHV2060AT, MHV2040AT  
DISK DRIVE  
PRODUCT MANUAL  
Revision History  
(1/1)  
Revised section (*1)  
(Added/Deleted/Altered)  
Edition  
01  
Date  
Details  
2004-11-15  
*1 Section(s) with asterisk (*) refer to the previous edition when those were deleted.  
C141-E218  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Preface  
This manual describes MHV2120AT, MHV2100AT, MHV2080AT, MHV2060AT,  
MHV2040AT model of the MHV Series, 2.5-inch hard disk drives. These drives  
have a built-in controller that is compatible with the ATA interface.  
This manual describes the specifications and functions of the drives and explains  
in detail how to incorporate the drives into user systems. This manual assumes  
that the reader has a basic knowledge of hard disk drives and their  
implementations in computer systems.  
This manual consists of seven chapters and sections explaining the special  
terminology and abbreviations used in this manual:  
Overview of Manual  
CHAPTER 1  
This chapter gives an overview of the disk drive and describes their features.  
CHAPTER 2 Device Configuration  
Device Overview  
This chapter describes the internal configurations of the disk drive and the  
configuration of the systems in which they operate.  
CHAPTER 3  
Installation Conditions  
This chapter describes the external dimensions, installation conditions, and switch  
settings of the disk drive.  
CHAPTER 4  
This chapter describes the operation theory of the disk drive.  
CHAPTER 5 Interface  
This chapter describes the interface specifications of the disk drive.  
CHAPTER 6 Operations  
Theory of Device Operation  
This chapter describes the operations of the disk drive.  
Glossary  
The glossary describes the technical terms that need to be understood to read this  
manual.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
This section gives the meanings of the definitions used in this manual.  
C141-E218  
i
Preface  
Conventions for Alert Messages  
This manual uses the following conventions to show the alert messages. An alert  
message consists of an alert signal and alert statements. The alert signal consists  
of an alert symbol and a signal word or just a signal word.  
The following are the alert signals and their meanings:  
This indicates a hazardous situation could result in  
minor or moderate personal injury if the user does  
not perform the procedure correctly. This alert  
signal also indicates that damages to the product or  
other property may occur if the user does not perform  
the procedure correctly.  
This indicates information that could help the user  
use the product more efficiently.  
In the text, the alert signal is centered, followed below by the indented message.  
A wider line space precedes and follows the alert message to show where the alert  
message begins and ends. The following is an example:  
(Example)  
Data corruption: Avoid mounting the disk drive near strong  
magnetic sources such as loud speakers. Ensure that the disk drive  
is not affected by external magnetic fields.  
The main alert messages in the text are also listed in the “Important Alert Items.”  
Operating Environment  
This product is designed to be used in offices or computer rooms.  
Conventions  
An MHV series device is sometimes simply referred to as a "hard disk drive,"  
"HDD," "drive," or "device" in this document.  
Decimal numbers are represented normally.  
Hexadecimal numbers are represented as shown in the following examples:  
X'17B9', 17B9h, 17B9H, or 17B9H.  
Binary numbers are represented as shown in the following examples: 010 or  
010b.  
ii  
C141-E218  
Preface  
Attention  
Please forward any comments you may have regarding this manual.  
To make this manual easier for users to understand, opinions from readers are  
needed. Please write your opinions or requests on the Comment at the back of  
this manual and forward it to the address described in the sheet.  
Liability Exception  
“Disk drive defects” refers to defects that involve adjustment, repair, or  
replacement.  
Fujitsu is not liable for any other disk drive defects, such as those caused by user  
misoperation or mishandling, inappropriate operating environments, defects in the  
power supply or cable, problems of the host system, or other causes outside the  
disk drive.  
C141-E218  
iii  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Important Alert Items  
Important Alert Messages  
The important alert messages in this manual are as follows:  
A hazardous situation could result in minor or moderate personal  
injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly. Also,  
damage to the product or other property, may occur if the user does not  
perform the procedure correctly.  
Task  
Alert message  
Page  
3-7  
Normal Operation  
Data corruption: Avoid mounting the disk near strong  
magnetic sources such as loud speakers. Ensure that the disk  
drive is not affected by external magnetic fields.  
Damage: Do not press the cover of the disk drive. Pressing  
it too hard, the cover and the spindle motor contact, which  
may cause damage to the disk drive.  
Static: When handling the device, disconnect the body  
ground (500 kor greater). Do not touch the printed circuit  
board, but hold it by the edges.  
3-10  
Damage: Interface cable connection  
Take not of the following precaution about plugging an  
interface cable (socket) into the interface connector of the  
disk drive and plugging the connector into a host receptacle:  
When plugging together the disk drive interface connector  
and the host receptacle or interface cable connector  
(socket), do not apply more than 10 kgf of force in the  
connection direction once they are snugly and securely in  
position.  
C141-E218  
v
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Manual Organization  
MHV2120AT, MHV2100AT,  
MHV2080AT, MHV2060AT,  
MHV2040AT  
• Device Overview  
• Device Configuration  
• Installation Conditions  
• Theory of Device Operation  
• Interface  
DISK DRIVE  
PRODUCT MANUAL  
(C141-E218)  
• Operations  
<This manual>  
MHV2120AT, MHV2100AT,  
MHV2080AT, MHV2060AT,  
MHV2040AT  
• Maintenance and Diagnosis  
• Removal and Replacement Procedure  
DISK DRIVE  
MAINTENANCE MANUAL  
(C141-F072)  
C141-E218  
vii  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Contents  
CHAPTER 1 Device Overview........................................................................1-1  
1.1 Features ..............................................................................................................1-2  
1.1.1 Functions and performance .....................................................................1-2  
1.1.2 Adaptability.............................................................................................1-2  
1.1.3 Interface...................................................................................................1-3  
1.2 Device Specifications.........................................................................................1-4  
1.2.1 Specifications summary ..........................................................................1-4  
1.2.2 Model and product number .....................................................................1-5  
1.3 Power Requirements...........................................................................................1-6  
1.4 Environmental Specifications ............................................................................1-8  
1.5 Acoustic Noise ...................................................................................................1-9  
1.6 Shock and Vibration...........................................................................................1-9  
1.7 Reliability.........................................................................................................1-10  
1.8 Error Rate .........................................................................................................1-11  
1.9 Media Defects...................................................................................................1-11  
1.10 Load/Unload Function....................................................................................1-11  
1.11 Advanced Power Management.......................................................................1-12  
CHAPTER 2 Device Configuration ................................................................2-1  
2.1 Device Configuration .........................................................................................2-2  
2.2 System Configuration.........................................................................................2-3  
2.2.1 ATA interface..........................................................................................2-3  
2.2.2 1 drive connection ...................................................................................2-3  
2.2.3 2 drives connection..................................................................................2-4  
C141-E218  
ix  
Contents  
CHAPTER 3 Installation Conditions ............................................................. 3-1  
3.1 Dimensions ........................................................................................................ 3-2  
3.2 Mounting............................................................................................................ 3-3  
3.3 Cable Connections............................................................................................. 3-9  
3.3.1 Device connector .................................................................................... 3-9  
3.3.2 Cable connector specifications............................................................. 3-10  
3.3.3 Device connection ................................................................................ 3-10  
3.3.4 Power supply connector (CN1) ............................................................ 3-11  
3.4 Jumper Settings................................................................................................ 3-11  
3.4.1 Location of setting jumpers.................................................................. 3-11  
3.4.2 Factory default setting .......................................................................... 3-12  
3.4.3 Master drive-slave drive setting ........................................................... 3-12  
3.4.4 CSEL setting......................................................................................... 3-13  
3.4.5 Power up in standby setting.................................................................. 3-14  
CHAPTER 4 Theory of Device Operation..................................................... 4-1  
4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................... 4-2  
4.2 Subassemblies.................................................................................................... 4-2  
4.2.1 Disk......................................................................................................... 4-2  
4.2.2 Spindle.................................................................................................... 4-2  
4.2.3 Actuator .................................................................................................. 4-2  
4.2.4 Air filter .................................................................................................. 4-3  
4.3 Circuit Configuration......................................................................................... 4-3  
4.4 Power-on Sequence ........................................................................................... 4-6  
4.5 Self-calibration .................................................................................................. 4-7  
4.5.1 Self-calibration contents......................................................................... 4-7  
4.5.2 Execution timing of self-calibration....................................................... 4-8  
4.5.3 Command processing during self-calibration......................................... 4-8  
4.6 Read/write Circuit.............................................................................................. 4-9  
4.6.1 Read/write preamplifier (PreAMP) ........................................................ 4-9  
x
C141-E218  
Contents  
4.6.2 Write circuit.............................................................................................4-9  
4.6.3 Read circuit............................................................................................4-10  
4.6.4 Digital PLL circuit.................................................................................4-11  
4.7 Servo Control ...................................................................................................4-12  
4.7.1 Servo control circuit..............................................................................4-12  
4.7.2 Data-surface servo format .....................................................................4-15  
4.7.3 Servo frame format................................................................................4-17  
4.7.4 Actuator motor control..........................................................................4-18  
4.7.5 Spindle motor control............................................................................4-19  
CHAPTER 5 Interface .....................................................................................5-1  
5.1 Physical Interface ...............................................................................................5-2  
5.1.1 Interface signals.......................................................................................5-2  
5.1.2 Signal assignment on the connector........................................................5-3  
5.2 Logical Interface.................................................................................................5-6  
5.2.1 I/O registers.............................................................................................5-7  
5.2.2 Command block registers........................................................................5-8  
5.2.3 Control block registers ..........................................................................5-13  
5.3 Host Commands ...............................................................................................5-14  
5.3.1 Command code and parameters ............................................................5-14  
5.3.2 Command descriptions..........................................................................5-18  
(1) RECALIBRATE (X’10’ to X’1F’).................................................5-20  
(2) READ SECTOR(S) (X’20’ or X’21’) ............................................5-21  
(3) WRITE SECTOR(S) (X’30’ or X’31’)...........................................5-23  
(4) WRITE VERIFY (X’3C’)...............................................................5-25  
(5) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) (X’40’ or X’41’).............................5-26  
(6) SEEK (X’70’ to X’7F’) ..................................................................5-27  
(7) EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC (X’90’) ................................5-28  
(8) INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (X’91’) ...........................5-30  
(9) DOWNLOAD MICROCODE (X’92’)...........................................5-31  
(10) STANDBY IMMEDIATE (X’94’ or X’E0’) ...............................5-33  
(11) IDLE IMMEDIATE (X’95’ or X’E1’) / UNLOAD  
IMMEDIATE (X’E1’)..................................................................5-34  
C141-E218  
xi  
Contents  
(12) STANDBY (X’96’ or X’E2’) .......................................................5-36  
(13) IDLE (X’97’ or X’E3’).................................................................5-37  
(14) CHECK POWER MODE (X’98’ or X’E5’).................................5-39  
(15) SLEEP (X’99’ or X’E6’) ..............................................................5-40  
(16) SMART (X’B0) ............................................................................5-41  
(17) DEVICE CONFIGURATION (X'B1')..........................................5-58  
(18) READ MULTIPLE (X’C4’) .........................................................5-63  
(19) WRITE MULTIPLE (X’C5’) .......................................................5-65  
(20) SET MULTIPLE MODE (X’C6’) ................................................5-67  
(21) READ DMA (X’C8’ or X’C9’) ....................................................5-69  
(22) WRITE DMA (X’CA’ or X’CB’).................................................5-71  
(23) READ BUFFER (X’E4’) ..............................................................5-73  
(24) FLUSH CACHE (X’E7’)..............................................................5-74  
(25) WRITE BUFFER (X’E8’) ............................................................5-75  
(26) IDENTIFY DEVICE (X’EC’) ......................................................5-76  
(27) IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA (X’EE’) ............................................5-77  
(28) SET FEATURES (X’EF’).............................................................5-89  
(29) SECURITY SET PASSWORD (X’F1’).......................................5-93  
(30) SECURITY UNLOCK(X’F2’) .....................................................5-95  
(31) SECURITY ERASE PREPARE (X’F3’)......................................5-97  
(32) SECURITY ERASE UNIT (X’F4’)..............................................5-98  
(33) SECURITY FREEZE LOCK (X’F5’) ..........................................5-99  
(34) SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD (X’F6’) ...........................5-101  
(35) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS (X’F8’) ...............................5-103  
(36) SET MAX (X’F9’)......................................................................5-104  
(37) READ SECTOR(S) EXT (X’24’): Option (customizing) .........5-110  
(38) READ DMA EXT (X’25’): Option (customizing)....................5-111  
(39) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT (X’27’): Option  
(customizing)..............................................................................5-112  
(40) READ MULTIPLE EXT (X’29’): Option (customizing)..........5-113  
(41) READ LOG EXT (X'2F') [Optional command  
(Customize)]...............................................................................5-114  
(42) WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT (X’34’): Option (customizing) .......5-116  
(43) WRITE DMA EXT (X’35’): Option (customizing) ..................5-117  
(44) SET MAX ADDRESS EXT (X’37’): Option  
(customizing)..............................................................................5-118  
xii  
C141-E218  
Contents  
(45) WRITE MULTIPLE EXT (X’39’): Option (customizing)........5-120  
(46) WRITE DMA FUA EXT (X’3D’): Option (customizing) ........5-121  
(47) WRITE LOG EXT (X’3F’) [Optional command  
(Customize)] ..............................................................................5-122  
(48) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT (X’42): Option  
(customizing) .............................................................................5-124  
(49) WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT (X’CE’): Option  
(customizing) .............................................................................5-125  
(50) FLUSH CACHE EXT (X’EA’): Option (customizing).............5-126  
5.3.3 Error posting........................................................................................5-127  
5.4 Command Protocol.........................................................................................5-129  
5.4.1 PIO Data transferring commands from device to host........................5-129  
5.4.2 PIO Data transferring commands from host to device........................5-132  
5.4.3 Commands without data transfer.........................................................5-134  
5.4.4 Other commands..................................................................................5-135  
5.4.5 DMA data transfer commands ............................................................5-135  
5.5 Ultra DMA Feature Set ..................................................................................5-137  
5.5.1 Overview .............................................................................................5-137  
5.5.2 Phases of operation..............................................................................5-138  
5.5.3 Ultra DMA data in commands ............................................................5-138  
5.5.3.1 Initiating an Ultra DMA data in burst......................................5-138  
5.5.3.2 The data in transfer ..................................................................5-139  
5.5.3.3 Pausing an Ultra DMA data in burst........................................5-139  
5.5.3.4 Terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst.................................5-140  
5.5.4 Ultra DMA data out commands ..........................................................5-143  
5.5.4.1 Initiating an Ultra DMA data out burst....................................5-143  
5.5.4.2 The data out transfer ................................................................5-144  
5.5.4.3 Pausing an Ultra DMA data out burst......................................5-144  
5.5.4.4 Terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst...............................5-145  
5.5.5 Ultra DMA CRC rules.........................................................................5-147  
5.5.6 Series termination required for Ultra DMA........................................5-148  
5.6 Timing ............................................................................................................5-149  
5.6.1 PIO data transfer..................................................................................5-149  
5.6.2 Multiword data transfer.......................................................................5-150  
5.6.3 Ultra DMA data transfer......................................................................5-151  
C141-E218  
xiii  
Contents  
5.6.3.1 Initiating an Ultra DMA data in burst..................................... 5-151  
5.6.3.2 Ultra DMA data burst timing requirements ............................ 5-152  
5.6.3.3 Sustained Ultra DMA data in burst......................................... 5-155  
5.6.3.4 Host pausing an Ultra DMA data in burst............................... 5-156  
5.6.3.5 Device terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst..................... 5-157  
5.6.3.6 Host terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst......................... 5-158  
5.6.3.7 Initiating an Ultra DMA data out burst................................... 5-159  
5.6.3.8 Sustained Ultra DMA data out burst....................................... 5-160  
5.6.3.9 Device pausing an Ultra DMA data out burst......................... 5-161  
5.6.3.10 Host terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst..................... 5-162  
5.6.3.11 Device terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst................. 5-163  
5.6.4 Power-on and reset ............................................................................. 5-164  
CHAPTER 6 Operations................................................................................. 6-1  
6.1 Device Response to the Reset............................................................................ 6-2  
6.1.1 Response to power-on............................................................................. 6-2  
6.1.2 Response to hardware reset .................................................................... 6-3  
6.1.3 Response to software reset ..................................................................... 6-5  
6.1.4 Response to diagnostic command........................................................... 6-6  
6.2 Power Save ........................................................................................................ 6-7  
6.2.1 Power save mode.................................................................................... 6-7  
6.2.2 Power commands.................................................................................... 6-9  
6.3 Defect Processing .............................................................................................. 6-9  
6.3.1 Spare area................................................................................................ 6-9  
6.3.2 Alternating processing for defective sectors ........................................ 6-10  
6.4 Read-ahead Cache ........................................................................................... 6-12  
6.4.1 DATA buffer structure ......................................................................... 6-12  
6.4.2 Caching operation................................................................................. 6-13  
6.4.3 Using the read segment buffer.............................................................. 6-15  
xiv  
C141-E218  
Contents  
6.4.3.1 Miss-hit ......................................................................................6-15  
6.4.3.2 Sequential hit..............................................................................6-16  
6.4.3.3 Full hit........................................................................................6-17  
6.4.3.4 Partial hit....................................................................................6-18  
6.5 Write Cache......................................................................................................6-19  
6.5.1 Cache operation.....................................................................................6-19  
Glossary ...........................................................................................................GL-1  
Acronyms and Abbreviations.........................................................................AB-1  
Index ................................................................................................................. IN-1  
C141-E218  
xv  
Contents  
Illustrations  
Figures  
Figure 1.1 Negative voltage at +5 V when power is turned off ......................... 1-6  
Figure 1.2 Current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V when power is  
turned on............................................................................................ 1-8  
Figure 2.1 Disk drive outer view........................................................................ 2-2  
Figure 2.2 1 drive system configuration............................................................. 2-3  
Figure 2.3 2 drives configuration........................................................................ 2-4  
Figure 3.1 Dimensions........................................................................................ 3-2  
Figure 3.2 Orientation......................................................................................... 3-3  
Figure 3.3 Mounting frame structure.................................................................. 3-4  
Figure 3.4 Location of breather .......................................................................... 3-5  
Figure 3.5 Surface temperature measurement points ......................................... 3-6  
Figure 3.6 Service area ....................................................................................... 3-7  
Figure 3.7 Handling cautions.............................................................................. 3-8  
Figure 3.8 Connector locations........................................................................... 3-9  
Figure 3.9 Cable connections ........................................................................... 3-10  
Figure 3.10 Power supply connector pins (CN1) ............................................... 3-11  
Figure 3.11 Jumper location ............................................................................... 3-11  
Figure 3.12 Factory default setting..................................................................... 3-12  
Figure 3.13 Jumper setting of master or slave drive .......................................... 3-12  
Figure 3.14 CSEL setting.................................................................................... 3-13  
Figure 3.15 Example (1) of cable select............................................................. 3-13  
Figure 3.16 Example (2) of cable select............................................................. 3-14  
Figure 4.1 Power supply configuration .............................................................. 4-4  
Figure 4.2 Circuit configuration ......................................................................... 4-5  
Figure 4.3 Power-on operation sequence............................................................ 4-6  
Figure 4.4 Read/write circuit block diagram...................................................... 4-9  
Figure 4.5 Frequency characteristic of programmable filter............................ 4-10  
Figure 4.6 Block diagram of servo control circuit............................................ 4-12  
Figure 4.7 Physical sector servo configuration on disk surface ....................... 4-16  
Figure 4.8 Servo frame format.......................................................................... 4-17  
Figure 5.1 Interface signals................................................................................. 5-2  
xvi  
C141-E218  
Contents  
Figure 5.2 Execution example of READ MULTIPLE command .....................5-63  
Figure 5.3 READ SECTOR(S) COMMAND protocol...................................5-130  
Figure 5.4 Protocol for command abort ..........................................................5-131  
Figure 5.5 WRITE SECTOR(S) command protocol.......................................5-133  
Figure 5.6 Protocol for the command execution without data  
transfer ...........................................................................................5-135  
Figure 5.7 Normal DMA data transfer ............................................................5-136  
Figure 5.8 Ultra DMA termination with pull-up or pull-down.......................5-148  
Figure 5.9 PIO data transfer timing.................................................................5-149  
Figure 5.10 Multiword DMA data transfer timing (mode 2) ............................5-150  
Figure 5.11 Initiating an Ultra DMA data in burst............................................5-151  
Figure 5.12 Sustained Ultra DMA data in burst................................................5-155  
Figure 5.13 Host pausing an Ultra DMA data in burst .....................................5-156  
Figure 5.14 Device terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst............................5-157  
Figure 5.15 Host terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst ...............................5-158  
Figure 5.16 Initiating an Ultra DMA data out burst..........................................5-159  
Figure 5.17 Sustained Ultra DMA data out burst..............................................5-160  
Figure 5.18 Device pausing an Ultra DMA data out burst................................5-161  
Figure 5.19 Host terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst .............................5-162  
Figure 5.20 Device terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst..........................5-163  
Figure 5.21 Power-on reset timing....................................................................5-164  
Figure 6.1 Response to power-on........................................................................6-3  
Figure 6.2 Response to hardware reset................................................................6-4  
Figure 6.3 Response to software reset.................................................................6-5  
Figure 6.4 Response to diagnostic command......................................................6-6  
Figure 6.5 Sector slip processing ......................................................................6-10  
Figure 6.6 Automatic alternating processing ....................................................6-11  
Figure 6.7 Data buffer structure ........................................................................6-12  
C141-E218  
xvii  
Contents  
Tables  
Table 1.1 Specifications ................................................................................... 1-4  
Table 1.2 Examples of model names and product numbers.............................. 1-5  
Table 1.3 Current and power dissipation........................................................... 1-7  
Table 1.4 Environmental specifications............................................................ 1-8  
Table 1.5 Acoustic noise specification.............................................................. 1-9  
Table 1.6 Shock and vibration specification ..................................................... 1-9  
Table 1.7 Advanced Power Management........................................................ 1-13  
Table 3.1 Surface temperature measurement points and standard  
values................................................................................................. 3-6  
Table 3.2 Cable connector specifications........................................................ 3-10  
Table 5.1 Signal assignment on the interface connector................................... 5-3  
Table 5.2 I/O registers....................................................................................... 5-7  
Table 5.3 Command code and parameters ..................................................... 5-15  
Table 5.4 Diagnostic code............................................................................... 5-28  
Table 5.5 Operation of DOWNLOAD MICROCODE ................................... 5-32  
Table 5.6 Example of rewriting procedure of data 512 KBytes  
(40000h Bytes) of microcode.......................................................... 5-32  
Table 5.7 Features register values (subcommands) and functions.................. 5-42  
Table 5.8 Format of device attribute value data.............................................. 5-46  
Table 5.9 Format of insurance failure threshold value data............................ 5-46  
Table 5.10 Off-line data collection status ......................................................... 5-49  
Table 5.11 Self-test execution status................................................................. 5-49  
Table 5.12 Off-line data collection capability................................................... 5-50  
Table 5.13 Failure prediction capability flag .................................................... 5-50  
Table 5.14 Error logging capability .................................................................. 5-51  
Table 5.15 Log directory data format................................................................ 5-51  
Table 5.16 Data format of SMART Summary Error Log................................. 5-53  
Table 5.17 Data format of SMART Comprehensive Error Log........................ 5-54  
Table 5.18 SMART self-test log data format.................................................... 5-55  
Table 5.19 Selective self-test log data structure................................................ 5-56  
Table 5.20 Selective self-test feature flags ....................................................... 5-57  
Table 5.21 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY data  
structure........................................................................................... 5-61  
Table 5.22 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE  
command ......................................................................................... 5-78  
Table 5.23 Features register values and settable modes ................................... 5-89  
Table 5.24 Contents of SECURITY SET PASSWORD data ........................... 5-93  
xviii  
C141-E218  
Contents  
Table 5.25 Relationship between combination of Identifier and  
Security level, and operation of the lock function...........................5-93  
Table 5.26 Contents of security password .......................................................5-101  
Table 5.27 Command code and parameters.....................................................5-127  
Table 5.28 Recommended series termination for Ultra DMA.........................5-148  
Table 5.29 Ultra DMA data burst timing requirements ..................................5-152  
Table 5.30 Ultra DMA sender and recipient timing requirements ..................5-154  
C141-E218  
xix  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
CHAPTER 1 Device Overview  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
1.5  
1.6  
1.7  
1.8  
1.9  
Features  
Device Specifications  
Power Requirements  
Environmental Specifications  
Acoustic Noise  
Shock and Vibration  
Reliability  
Error Rate  
Media Defects  
1.10 Load/Unload Function  
1.11 Advanced Power Management  
Overview and features are described in this chapter, and specifications and power  
requirement are described.  
The disk drive is 2.5-inch hard disk drives with built-in disk controllers. These  
disk drives use the AT-bus hard disk interface protocol and are compact and  
reliable.  
C141-E218  
1-1  
Device Overview  
1.1 Features  
1.1.1 Functions and performance  
The following features of the disk drive are described.  
(1) Compact  
The disk drive has up to 2 disks of 65 mm (2.5 inches) diameter, and its height is  
9.5 mm (0.374 inch).  
(2) Green product  
The disk drive is lead (Pb)-free products and the European Parliament and  
Council Directive on the Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in  
electrical and electronic equipment (the RoHS Directive) compliant.  
(3) Large capacity  
The disk drive can record up to 60 GB (formatted) on one disk using the RLL  
recording method and 30 recording zone technology. The disk drive has a  
formatted capacity of 120 GB (MHV2120AT), 100 GB (MHV2100AT), 80 GB  
(MHV2080AT), 60 GB (MHV2060AT) and 40 GB (MHV2040AT).  
(4) High-speed Transfer rate  
The disk drive (the MHV Series) has an internal data rate up to 41.3 MB/s. The  
disk drive supports an external data rate up to 100 MB/s (U-DMA mode 5).  
(5) Average positioning time  
Use of a rotary voice coil motor in the head positioning mechanism greatly  
increases the positioning speed. The average positioning time is 12 ms (at read).  
1.1.2 Adaptability  
(1) Power save mode  
The power save mode feature for Idle operation, Standby and Sleep modes and  
automatically power down by APM function makes the disk drive ideal for  
mobile use where power consumption is a factor.  
(2) Wide temperature range  
The disk drive can be used over a wide temperature range (5 °C to 55 °C).  
(3) Low noise and vibration  
In Ready status (while the device is waiting for any commands), the Sound Power  
level of the disk drives in idle mode is 1.5B [MHV2040AT]/2.3B [MHV2060AT,  
1-2  
C141-E218  
1.1 Features  
MHV2080AT, MHV2100AT, MHV2120AT]. The Sound Pressure level is 16dB  
[MHV2040AT]/24dB [MHV2060AT, MHV2080AT, MHV2100AT,  
MHV2120AT], as measured 0.3 m from the drive in Idle mode.  
(4) High resistance against shock  
The Load/Unload mechanism is highly resistant against non-operation shock up  
to 8820 m/s2 (900G).  
1.1.3 Interface  
(1) Connection to ATA interface  
The disk drive has built-in controllers compatible with the ATA interface.  
(2) Data buffer  
The disk drive uses 8MB data buffer to transfer data between the host and the disk  
media.  
In combination with the read-ahead cache system described in item (3) and the  
write cache described in item (7), the buffer contributes to efficient I/O  
processing.  
(3) Read-ahead cache system  
After the execution of a disk read command, the disk drive automatically reads the  
subsequent data block and writes it to the data buffer (read ahead operation). This  
cache system enables fast data access. The next disk read command would normally  
cause another disk access. But, if the read ahead data corresponds to the data  
requested by the next read command, the data in the buffer can be transferred instead.  
(4) Master/slave  
The disk drive can be connected to ATA interface as daisy chain configuration.  
Drive 0 is a master device, drive 1 is a slave device.  
(5) Error correction and retry by ECC  
If a recoverable error occurs, the disk drive itself attempts error recovery. The  
ECC has improved buffer error correction for correctable data errors.  
(6) Self-diagnosis  
The disk drive has a diagnostic function to check operation of the controller and disk  
drive. Executing a diagnostic function of the smart command invokes self-diagnosis.  
(7) Write cache  
When the disk drive receives a write command, the disk drive posts the command  
completion at completion of transferring data to the data buffer completion of  
writing to the disk media. This feature reduces the access time at writing.  
C141-E218  
1-3  
Device Overview  
1.2 Device Specifications  
1.2.1 Specifications summary  
Table 1.1 shows the specifications of the disk drives.  
Table 1.1 Specifications (1 of 2)  
MHV2120AT MHV2100AT MHV2080AT MHV2060AT MHV2040AT  
Format Capacity (*1)  
Number of Sectors (User)  
Bytes per Sector  
120 GB  
100 GB  
80GB  
60GB  
40GB  
234,441,648 195,371,568 156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160  
512 bytes  
4,200 rpm ± 1%  
7.14 ms  
Rotational Speed  
Average Latency  
Positioning time (read and seek)  
Minimum (Track-Track)  
Average  
1.5 ms (typ.)  
Read: 12ms (typ.)  
22 ms (typ.)  
Maximum (Full)  
Start time  
Interface  
3.5 sec (typ.)  
ATA-6 (Max. Cable length: 18inches (0.46 m))  
(equipped with expansion function)  
Data Transfer Rate (*1)  
To/From Media  
To/From Host  
43.7 MB/s Max.  
100 MB/s Max (U-DMA mode5)  
Data Buffer Size (*2)  
8MB (8,388,608 bytes)  
Physical Dimensions  
(Height × Width × Depth)  
9.5 mm × 100.0 mm × 70.0 mm  
Weight  
100 g (max)  
96 g (max)  
*1: 1GB is equal to 1,000,000,000 bytes and 1MB is equal to 1,000,000 bytes.  
*2: 1MB is equal to 1,048,576 bytes.  
1-4  
C141-E218  
1.2 Device Specifications  
Table 1.1 lists the formatted capacity, number of logical cylinders, number  
of heads, and number of sectors of every model for which the CHS mode  
has been selected using the BIOS setup utility on the host.  
Table 1.1 Specifications (2 of 2)  
Model  
Capacity  
No. of Cylinder  
No. of Heads  
No. of Sectors  
MHV2120AT  
MHV2100AT  
MHV2080AT  
MHV2060AT  
MHV2040AT  
8.45 GB  
8.45 GB  
8.45 GB  
8.45 GB  
8.45 GB  
16,383  
16,383  
16,383  
16,383  
16,383  
16  
16  
16  
16  
16  
63  
63  
63  
63  
63  
1.2.2 Model and product number  
Table 1.2 lists the model names and product numbers of the disk drive.  
The model name does not necessarily correspond to the product number as listed  
in Table 1.2 since some models have been customized and have specifications  
that are different from those for the standard model.  
If a disk drive is ordered as a replacement drive, the product number must be the  
same as that of the drive being replaced.  
Table 1.2 Examples of model names and product numbers  
Capacity  
Model Name  
Mounting screw  
Order No.  
CA06557-B042  
(user area)  
120GB  
100GB  
80GB  
MHV2120AT  
MHV2100AT  
MHV2080AT  
MHV2060AT  
MHV2040AT  
M3 Depth 3  
M3 Depth 3  
M3 Depth 3  
M3 Depth 3  
M3 Depth 3  
CA06557-B040/B140  
CA06557-B038/B138/B148  
CA06557-B026/B126/B136  
CA06557-B124  
60GB  
40GB  
C141-E218  
1-5  
Device Overview  
1.3 Power Requirements  
(1) Input Voltage  
+ 5 V ± 5 %  
(2) Ripple  
+5 V  
Maximum  
Frequency  
100 mV (peak to peak)  
DC to 1 MHz  
(3) A negative voltage like the bottom figure isn't to occur at +5 V when power is turned  
off and, a thing with no ringing.  
Permissible level: 0.2 V  
5
4
3
2
1
0
-1  
0
100  
200  
300  
400  
500  
600  
700  
800  
Time [ms]  
Figure 1.1 Negative voltage at +5 V when power is turned off  
1-6  
C141-E218  
1.3 Power Requirements  
(4) Current Requirements and Power Dissipation  
Table 1.3 lists the current and power dissipation (typical).  
Table 1.3 Current and power dissipation  
Typical RMS Current  
Typical Power (*3)  
Spin up (*1)  
Idle  
0.9 A  
100 mA  
320 mA  
380 mA  
40 mA  
20 mA  
4.5 W  
0.5 W  
1.6 W  
1.9 W  
0.2 W  
0.1 W  
R/W (on track) (*2)  
Seek (*5)  
Standby  
Sleep  
0.004 W/GB (rank E / MHV2120AT)  
0.005 W/GB (rank E / MHV2100AT)  
0.006 W/GB (rank E / MHV2080AT)  
0.008 W/GB (rank E / MHV2060AT)  
0.013 W/GB (rank D / MHV2040AT)  
Energy  
Efficiency (*4)  
*1  
*2  
Maximum current at starting spindle motor.  
Current and power level when the operation (command) that accompanies a  
transfer of 63 sectors is executed 3 times in 100 ms  
*3  
*4  
Power requirements reflect typical values for +5 V power.  
Energy efficiency based on the Law concerning the Rational Use of Energy  
indicates the value obtained by dividing power consumption by the storage  
capacity. (Japan only)  
*5  
The seek average current is specified based on three operations per 100  
msec.  
C141-E218  
1-7  
Device Overview  
(5) Current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V when power is turned on  
Figure 1.2 Current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V when power is turned on  
(6) Power on/off sequence  
The voltage detector circuits monitor +5 V. The circuits do not allow a write  
signal if either voltage is abnormal. These prevent data from being destroyed and  
eliminate the need to be concerned with the power on/off sequence.  
1.4 Environmental Specifications  
Table 1.4 lists the environmental specifications.  
Table 1.4 Environmental specifications  
Item  
Specification  
Temperature  
• Operating  
5 °C to 55 °C (ambient)  
5 °C to 60 °C (disk enclosure surface)  
–40 °C to 65 °C  
20 °C/h or less  
• Non-operating  
• Thermal Gradient  
Humidity  
• Operating  
• Non-operating  
• Maximum Wet Bulb  
8 % to 90 % RH (Non-condensing)  
5 % to 95 % RH (Non-condensing)  
29 °C (Operating)  
40 °C (Non-operating)  
Altitude (relative to sea level)  
• Operating  
• Non-operating  
–300 to 3,000 m  
–300 to 12,000 m  
1-8  
C141-E218  
1.5 Acoustic Noise  
1.5 Acoustic Noise  
Table 1.5 lists the acoustic noise specification.  
Table 1.5 Acoustic noise specification  
Item  
Specification (typical)  
Idle mode (DRIVE READY)  
Sound Power  
1.5B [MHV2040AT]  
2.3B [MHV2120AT/MHV2100AT/MHV2080AT/MHV2060AT]  
Sound Pressure (at 0.3m)  
16dB [MHV2040AT]  
24dB [MHV2120AT/MHV2100AT/MHV2080AT/MHV2060AT]  
Note:  
Measure the noise from the cover top surface.  
1.6 Shock and Vibration  
Table 1.6 lists the shock and vibration specification.  
Table 1.6 Shock and vibration specification  
Item  
Specification  
Vibration (Swept sine, 1/4 octave per minute)  
• Operating  
5 to 500 Hz, 9.8m/s2 0-peak (1G 0-peak)  
(without non-recovered errors)  
5 to 500 Hz, 49m/s2 0-peak (5G 0-peak)  
(no damage)  
• Non-operating  
Shock (half-sine pulse)  
• Operating  
2940 m/s2 0-peak (300G 0-peak)  
2ms duration  
(without non-recovered errors)  
• Non-operating  
8820 m/s2 0-peak (900G 0-peak)  
1ms duration  
1176 m/s2 0-peak (120G 0-peak)  
11ms duration  
(no damage)  
C141-E218  
1-9  
Device Overview  
1.7 Reliability  
(1) Mean time between failures (MTBF)  
Conditions of 300,000 h Power-on time 250H/month or less 3000H/years  
or less  
Operating time 20 % or less of power-on time  
Environment  
5 to 55 °C/8 to 90 %  
But humidity bulb temperature  
29 °C or less  
MTBF is defined as follows:  
Total operation time in all fields  
MTBF=  
(H)  
number of device failure in all fields (*1)  
*1 “Disk drive defects” refers to defects that involve repair, readjustment, or  
replacement. Disk drive defects do not include failures caused by external  
factors, such as damage caused by handling, inappropriate operating  
environments, defects in the power supply host system, or interface cable.  
(2) Mean time to repair (MTTR)  
The mean time to repair (MTTR) is 30 minutes or less, if repaired by a specialist  
maintenance staff member.  
(3) Service life  
In situations where management and handling are correct, the disk drive requires  
no overhaul for five years when the DE surface temperature is less than 48 °C.  
When the DE surface temperature exceeds 48 °C, the disk drives requires no  
overhaul for five years or 20,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first.  
Refer to item (3) in Subsection 3.2 for the measurement point of the DE surface  
temperature. Also the operating conditions except the environment temperature  
are based on the MTBF conditions.  
(4) Data assurance in the event of power failure  
Except for the data block being written to, the data on the disk media is assured in  
the event of any power supply abnormalities. This does not include power supply  
abnormalities during disk media initialization (formatting) or processing of  
defects (alternative block assignment).  
1-10  
C141-E218  
1.8 Error Rate  
1.8 Error Rate  
Known defects, for which alternative blocks can be assigned, are not included in  
the error rate count below. It is assumed that the data blocks to be accessed are  
evenly distributed on the disk media.  
(1) Unrecoverable read error  
Read errors that cannot be recovered by maximum read retries of drive without  
user’s retry and ECC corrections shall occur no more than 10 times when reading  
data of 1014 bits. Read retries are executed according to the disk drive’s error  
recovery procedure, and include read retries accompanying head offset  
operations.  
(2) Positioning error  
Positioning (seek) errors that can be recovered by one retry shall occur no more  
than 10 times in 107 seek operations.  
1.9 Media Defects  
Defective sectors are replaced with alternates when the disk drive is formatted  
prior to shipment from the factory (low level format). Thus, the hosts see a  
defect-free device.  
Alternate sectors are automatically accessed by the disk drive. The user need not  
be concerned with access to alternate sectors.  
1.10 Load/Unload Function  
The Load/Unload function is a mechanism that loads the head on the disk and  
unloads the head from the disk.  
The product supports a minimum of 600,000 Load/Unload cycles.  
Unload is a normal head unloading operation and the commands listed below are  
executed.  
Hard Reset  
STANDBY  
STANDBY IMMEDIATE  
SLEEP  
IDLE  
C141-E218  
1-11  
Device Overview  
Emergency Unload other than Unload is performed when the power is shut down  
while the heads are still loaded on the disk.  
The product supports the Emergency Unload a minimum of 20,000 times.  
When the power is shut down, the controlled Unload cannot be executed.  
Therefore, the number of Emergency other than Unload is specified.  
Remark:  
We recommend cutting the power supply of the HDD for this device after the  
Head Unload operation completes. The recommended power supply cutting  
sequence for this device is as follows:  
1) Disk Flush  
Flush Cache command execution.  
2) Head Unload  
Standby Immediate command execution.  
3) Wait Status  
Checking whether bit 7 of the status register was set to '0'.  
(wait to complete STANDBY IMMEDIATE command)  
4) HDD power supply cutting  
1.11 Advanced Power Management  
The disk drive automatically shifts to the power saving mode according to the  
setting of the APM mode under the idle condition.  
The APM mode can be chosen with a Sector Count register of the SET  
FEATURES (EF) command.  
The disk drive complies with the three kinds of APM modes that a command  
from the host is required.  
FR = 05h : Enable APM  
SC = C0h - FEh :  
SC = 80h - BFh :  
SC = 01h - 7Fh :  
Mode-0 Active Idle Low Power Idle  
Mode-1 Active Idle Low Power Idle (Default)  
Mode-2 Active Idle Low Power Idle Standby  
FR = 85h : Disable APM (Set Mode-0)  
Active Idle:  
The head is in a position of extreme inner in disk  
medium. (VCM Lock)  
Low Power Idle:  
The head is unloaded from disk.  
The spindle motor rotates.  
1-12  
C141-E218  
1.11 Advanced Power Management  
The spindle motor stops.  
Standby:  
In APM Mode-1, which is the APM default mode, the operation status shifts till it  
finally reaches "Low Power Idle."  
Table 1.7 Advanced Power Management  
Active Idle  
(VCM Lock)  
Low Power Idle  
(Unload)  
Standby  
(Spin Off)  
APM Mode  
Mode-0  
Mode-1  
Mode-2  
0.2-1.2 sec  
0.2-1.2 sec  
0.2-1.2 sec  
15 min.  
N/A  
N/A  
10.0-40.0 sec  
10.0-40.0 sec  
10.0-40.0 sec  
When the maximum time that the HDD is waiting for commands has been  
exceeded:  
Mode-0: Mode shifts from Active condition to Active Idle in 0.2-1.2, and to Low  
Power Idle in 15 minutes.  
Mode-1: Mode shifts from Active condition to Active Idle in 0.2-1.2 seconds and  
to Low Power Idle in 10.0-40.0 seconds.  
Mode-2: Mode shifts from Active condition to Active Idle in 0.2-1.2 seconds and  
to Low Power Idle in 10.0-40.0 seconds. After 10.0-40.0 seconds in  
Low Power Idle, the mode shifts to standby.  
C141-E218  
1-13  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
CHAPTER 2 Device Configuration  
2.1  
2.2  
Device Configuration  
System Configuration  
This chapter describes the internal configurations of the hard disk drives and the  
configuration of the systems in which they operate.  
C141-E218  
2-1  
Device Configuration  
2.1 Device Configuration  
Figure 2.1 shows the disk drive. The disk drive consists of a disk enclosure (DE),  
read/write preamplifier, and controller PCA. The disk enclosure contains the disk  
media, heads, spindle motors, actuators, and a circulating air filter.  
Figure 2.1 Disk drive outer view  
(1) Disk  
The outer diameter of the disk is 65 mm. The inner diameter is 20 mm.  
(2) Head  
The heads are of the load/unload (L/UL) type. The head unloads the disk out of  
while the disk is not rotating and loads on the disk when the disk starts.  
(3) Spindle motor  
The disks are rotated by a direct drive Sensor-less DC motor.  
(4) Actuator  
The actuator uses a revolving voice coil motor (VCM) structure which consumes  
low power and generates very little heat. The head assembly at the edge of the  
actuator arm is controlled and positioned by feedback of the servo information  
read by the read/write head. If the power is not on or if the spindle motor is  
stopped, the head assembly stays on the ramp out of the disk and is fixed by a  
mechanical lock.  
(5) Air circulation system  
The disk enclosure (DE) is sealed to prevent dust and dirt from entering. The disk  
enclosure features a closed loop air circulation system that relies on the blower  
effect of the rotating disk. This system continuously circulates the air through the  
circulation filter to maintain the cleanliness of the air within the disk enclosure.  
2-2  
C141-E218  
2.2 System Configuration  
(6) Read/write circuit  
The read/write circuit uses a LSI chip for the read/write preamplifier. It improves  
data reliability by preventing errors caused by external noise.  
(7) Controller circuit  
The controller circuit consists of an LSI chip to improve reliability. The high-  
speed microprocessor unit (MPU) achieves a high-performance AT controller.  
2.2 System Configuration  
2.2.1 ATA interface  
Figures 2.2 and 2.3 show the ATA interface system configuration. The drive has  
a 44pin PC AT interface connector and supports PIO mode 4 transfer at 16.6  
MB/s, Multiword DMA mode 2 transfer at 16.6 MB/s and also U-DMA mode 5  
(100 MB/s).  
2.2.2 1 drive connection  
MHV2120AT  
MHV2100AT  
MHV2080AT  
MHV2060AT  
MHV2040AT  
Figure 2.2 1 drive system configuration  
C141-E218  
2-3  
Device Configuration  
2.2.3 2 drives connection  
MHV2120AT  
MHV2100AT  
MHV2080AT  
MHV2060AT  
MHV2040AT  
(Host adaptor)  
MHV2120AT  
MHV2100AT  
MHV2080AT  
MHV2060AT  
MHV2040AT  
Note:  
When the drive that is not conformed to ATA is connected to the disk drive above  
configuration, the operation is not guaranteed.  
Figure 2.3 2 drives configuration  
HA (host adaptor) consists of address decoder, driver, and receiver.  
ATA is an abbreviation of “AT attachment”. The disk drive is  
conformed to the ATA-6 interface.  
At high-speed data transfer (PIO mode 4 or DMA mode 2 U-DMA  
mode 5), occurrence of ringing or crosstalk of the signal lines (AT  
bus) between the HA and the disk drive may be a great cause of the  
obstruction of system reliability. Thus, it is necessary that the  
capacitance of the signal lines including the HA and cable does not  
exceed the ATA-6 standard, and the cable length between the HA  
and the disk drive should be as short as possible.  
No need to push the top cover of the disk drive. If the over-power  
worked, the cover could be contacted with the spindle motor. Thus,  
that could be made it the cause of failure.  
2-4  
C141-E218  
CHAPTER 3 Installation Conditions  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
Dimensions  
Mounting  
Cable Connections  
Jumper Settings  
This chapter gives the external dimensions, installation conditions, surface  
temperature conditions, cable connections, and switch settings of the hard disk  
drives.  
For information about handling this hard disk drive and the system installation  
procedure, refer to the following Integration Guide.  
C141-E144  
C141-E218  
3-1  
Installation Conditions  
3.1 Dimensions  
Figure 3.1 illustrates the dimensions of the disk drive and positions of the  
mounting screw holes. All dimensions are in mm.  
Figure 3.1 Dimensions  
3-2  
C141-E218  
3.2 Mounting  
3.2 Mounting  
For information on mounting, see the "FUJITSU 2.5-INCH HDD  
INTEGRATION GUIDANCE (C141-E144)."  
(1) Orientation  
Figure 3.2 illustrates the allowable orientations for the disk drive.  
gravity  
(a) Horizontal –1  
(b) Horizontal –1  
gravity  
(c) Vertical –1  
(d) Vertical –2  
gravity  
(f) Vertical –4  
(e) Vertical –3  
Figure 3.2 Orientation  
C141-E218  
3-3  
Installation Conditions  
(2) Frame  
The MR head bias of the HDD disk enclosure (DE) is zero. The mounting frame  
is connected to SG.  
Use M3 screw for the mounting screw and the screw length should  
satisfy the specification in Figure 3.3.  
The tightening torque must be 0.49Nm (5kgfcm).  
When attaching the HDD to the system frame, do not allow the  
system frame to touch parts (cover and base) other than parts to  
which the HDD is attached.  
(3) Limitation of mounting  
Note) These dimensions are recommended values; if it is not possible to satisfy  
them, contact us.  
Side surface  
mounting  
2.5  
2.5  
Bottom surface mounting  
DE  
2.5  
2.5  
2
B
PCA  
A
Frame of system  
cabinet  
Frame of system  
cabinet  
3.0 or less  
Details of A  
Screw  
Screw  
3.0 or less  
Details of B  
Figure 3.3 Mounting frame structure  
3-4  
C141-E218  
3.2 Mounting  
Because of breather hole mounted to the HDD, do not allow this to  
close during mounting.  
Locating of breather hole is shown as Figure 3.4.  
For breather hole of Figure 3.4, at least, do not allow its around  
φ 2.4 to block.  
Figure 3.4 Location of breather  
C141-E218  
3-5  
Installation Conditions  
(4) Ambient temperature  
The temperature conditions for a disk drive mounted in a cabinet refer to the  
ambient temperature at a point 3 cm from the disk drive. The ambient  
temperature must satisfy the temperature conditions described in Section 1.4, and  
the airflow must be considered to prevent the DE surface temperature from  
exceeding 60 °C.  
Provide air circulation in the cabinet such that the PCA side, in particular,  
receives sufficient cooling. To check the cooling efficiency, measure the surface  
temperatures of the DE. Regardless of the ambient temperature, this surface  
temperature must meet the standards listed in Table 3.1. Figure 3.5 shows the  
temperature measurement point.  
1
Figure 3.5 Surface temperature measurement points  
Table 3.1 Surface temperature measurement points and standard values  
No.  
1
Measurement point  
DE cover  
Temperature  
60 °C max  
3-6  
C141-E218  
3.2 Mounting  
(5) Service area  
Figure 3.6 shows how the drive must be accessed (service areas) during and after  
installation.  
Mounting screw hole  
Cable connection  
Mounting screw hole  
Figure 3.6 Service area  
Data corruption: Avoid mounting the disk drive near strong  
magnetic sources such as loud speakers. Ensure that the disk drive  
is not affected by external magnetic fields.  
Damage: Do not press the cover of the disk drive. Pressing it too  
hard, the cover and the spindle motor contact, which may cause  
damage to the disk drive.  
Static: When handling the device, disconnect the body ground  
(500 kor greater). Do not touch the printed circuit board, but  
hold it by the edges.  
(6) Handling cautions  
Please keep the following cautions, and handle the HDD under the safety  
environment.  
C141-E218  
3-7  
Installation Conditions  
-
General notes  
ESD mat  
Shock absorbing mat  
Wrist strap  
Use the Wrist strap.  
Place the shock absorbing mat on the  
operation table, and place ESD mat on it.  
Do not hit HDD each other.  
Do not stack when carrying.  
Do not place HDD vertically  
to avoid falling down.  
Do not drop.  
Figure 3.7 Handling cautions  
-
-
Installation  
(1) Please use the driver of a low impact when you use an electric driver.  
HDD is occasionally damaged by the impact of the driver.  
(2) Please observe the tightening torque of the screw strictly.  
M3 ······· 0.49N•m (5 kgf•cm).  
Recommended equipments  
Contents  
Model  
Maker  
ESD  
Wrist strap  
JX-1200-3056-8  
SUMITOMO 3M  
ESD mat  
SKY-8A (Color Seiden Mat) Achilles  
SS-6500 HIOS  
Shock  
Low shock driver  
3-8  
C141-E218  
3.3 Cable Connections  
3.3 Cable Connections  
3.3.1 Device connector  
The disk drive has the connectors and terminals listed below for connecting  
external devices. Figure 3.8 shows the locations of these connectors and  
terminals.  
PCA  
Connector,  
setting pins  
Figure 3.8 Connector locations  
C141-E218  
3-9  
Installation Conditions  
3.3.2 Cable connector specifications  
Table 3.2 lists the recommended specifications for the cable connectors.  
Table 3.2 Cable connector specifications  
Name  
Model  
Manufacturer  
FCI  
ATA interface and power  
supply cable (44-pin type)  
Cable socket  
(44-pin type)  
89361-144  
For the host interface cable, use a ribbon cable. A twisted cable or a  
cable with wires that have become separated from the ribbon may cause  
crosstalk between signal lines. This is because the interface is designed  
for ribbon cables and not for cables carrying differential signals.  
3.3.3 Device connection  
Figure 3.9 shows how to connect the devices.  
ATA-cable  
Disk Drive #0  
Disk Drive #1  
Host system  
DC  
Power supply  
Power supply cable  
Figure 3.9 Cable connections  
Damage: Interface cable connection  
Take not of the following precaution about plugging an interface cable (socket)  
into the interface connector of the disk drive and plugging the connector into a  
host receptacle:  
When plugging together the disk drive interface connector and the host receptacle or  
interface cable connector (socket), do not apply more than 10 kgf of force in the  
connection direction once they are snugly and securely in position.  
3-10  
C141-E218  
3.4 Jumper Settings  
3.3.4 Power supply connector (CN1)  
Figure 3.10 shows the pin assignment of the power supply connector (CN1).  
Figure 3.10 Power supply connector pins (CN1)  
3.4 Jumper Settings  
3.4.1 Location of setting jumpers  
Figure 3.11 shows the location of the jumpers to select drive configuration and  
functions.  
Figure 3.11 Jumper location  
C141-E218  
3-11  
Installation Conditions  
3.4.2 Factory default setting  
Figure 3.12 shows the default setting position at the factory.  
Open  
Figure 3.12 Factory default setting  
3.4.3 Master drive-slave drive setting  
Master drive (disk drive #0) or slave drive (disk drive #1) is selected.  
Open  
1
2
C
D
A
B
A
1
2
C
Short  
Open  
D
B
Open  
(a) Master drive  
(b) Slave drive  
Figure 3.13 Jumper setting of master or slave drive  
Note:  
Pins A and C should be open.  
3-12  
C141-E218  
3.4 Jumper Settings  
3.4.4 CSEL setting  
Figure 3.14 shows the cable select (CSEL) setting.  
Open  
1
2
C
A
D
B
Short  
Note:  
The CSEL setting is not depended on setting between pins Band D.  
Figure 3.14 CSEL setting  
Figure 3.15 and 3.16 show examples of cable selection using unique interface  
cables.  
By connecting the CSEL of the master drive to the CSEL Line (conducer) of the  
cable and connecting it to ground further, the CSEL is set to low level. The drive  
is identified as a master drive. At this time, the CSEL of the slave drive does not  
have a conductor. Thus, since the slave drive is not connected to the CSEL  
conductor, the CSEL is set to high level. The drive is identified as a slave drive.  
drive  
drive  
Figure 3.15 Example (1) of cable select  
C141-E218  
3-13  
Installation Conditions  
drive  
drive  
Figure 3.16 Example (2) of cable select  
3.4.5 Power up in standby setting  
When pin C is grounded, the drive does not spin up at power on.  
3-14  
C141-E218  
CHAPTER 4 Theory of Device Operation  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
Outline  
Subassemblies  
Circuit Configuration  
Power-on Sequence  
Self-calibration  
Read/write Circuit  
Servo Control  
This chapter explains basic design concepts of the disk drive. Also, this chapter  
explains subassemblies of the disk drive, each sequence, servo control, and  
electrical circuit blocks.  
C141-E218  
4-1  
Theory of Device Operation  
4.1 Outline  
This chapter consists of two parts. First part (Section 4.2) explains mechanical  
assemblies of the disk drive. Second part (Sections 4.3 through 4.7) explains a  
servo information recorded in the disk drive and drive control method.  
4.2 Subassemblies  
The disk drive consists of a disk enclosure (DE) and printed circuit assembly  
(PCA).  
The DE contains all movable parts in the disk drive, including the disk, spindle,  
actuator, read/write head, and air filter. For details, see Subsections 4.2.1 to 4.2.4.  
The PCA contains the control circuits for the disk drive. The disk drive has one  
PCA. For details, see Sections 4.3.  
4.2.1 Disk  
The DE contains disks with an outer diameter of 65 mm and an inner diameter of  
20 mm.  
Servo data is recorded on each cylinder (total 172). Servo data written at factory  
is read out by the read head. For servo data, see Section 4.7.  
4.2.2 Spindle  
The spindle consists of a disk stack assembly and spindle motor. The disk stack  
assembly is activated by the direct drive sensor-less DC spindle motor, which has  
a speed of 4,200 rpm 1%. The spindle is controlled with detecting a PHASE  
signal generated by counter electromotive voltage of the spindle motor at starting.  
4.2.3 Actuator  
The actuator consists of a voice coil motor (VCM) and a head carriage. The VCM  
moves the head carriage along the inner or outer edge of the disk. The head  
carriage position is controlled by feeding back the difference of the target position  
that is detected and reproduced from the servo information read by the read/write  
head.  
4-2  
C141-E218  
4.3 Circuit Configuration  
4.2.4 Air filter  
There are two types of air filters: a breather filter and a circulation filter.  
The breather filter makes an air in and out of the DE to prevent unnecessary  
pressure around the spindle when the disk starts or stops rotating. When disk  
drives are transported under conditions where the air pressure changes a lot,  
filtered air is circulated in the DE.  
The circulation filter cleans out dust and dirt from inside the DE. The disk drive  
cycles air continuously through the circulation filter through an enclosed loop air  
cycle system operated by a blower on the rotating disk.  
4.3 Circuit Configuration  
Figure 4.1 shows the power supply configuration of the disk drive, and Figure 4.2  
shows the disk drive circuit configuration.  
(1) Read/write circuit  
The read/write circuit consists of two circuits; read/write preamplifier (PreAMP)  
and read channel (RDC).  
The PreAMP consists of the write current switch circuit, that flows the write  
current to the head coil, and the voltage amplifier circuit, that amplitudes the read  
output from the head.  
The RDC is the read demodulation circuit using the Modified Extended Partial  
Response (MEEPR), and contains the Viterbi detector, programmable filter,  
adaptable transversal filter, times base generator, data separator circuits,  
RLL (Run Length Limited) encoder and servo demodulation circuit.  
(2) Servo circuit  
The position and speed of the voice coil motor are controlled by closed-loop servo  
using the servo information recorded on the data surface. The servo information  
is an analog signal converted to digital for processing by a MPU and then  
reconverted to an analog signal for control of the voice coil motor.  
The MPU precisely sets each head on the track according on the servo  
information on the media surface.  
(3) Spindle motor driver circuit  
The circuit measures the interval of a PHASE signal generated by counter-  
electromotive voltage of a motor and controls the motor speed comparing target  
speed.  
C141-E218  
4-3  
Theory of Device Operation  
(4) Controller circuit  
Major functions are listed below.  
ATA interface control and data transfer control  
Data buffer management  
Sector format control  
Defect management  
ECC control  
Error recovery and self-diagnosis  
5.0V  
S-DRAM  
3.3V  
generator  
circuit  
1.2V  
generator  
circuit  
SVC  
PreAMP  
3.3V  
-3.0V  
Serial  
-FROM  
MCU & HDC & RDC  
Combo  
1.2V  
3.3V  
Figure 4.1 Power supply configuration  
4-4  
C141-E218  
4.3 Circuit Configuration  
ATA Interface  
PCA  
Console  
MCU & HDC & RDC  
Data Buffer  
SDRAM  
MCU  
HDC  
Serial  
Flash ROM  
RDC  
Shock  
Sensor  
SVC  
Resonator  
20MHz  
DE  
SP Motor  
Media  
VCM  
Thermistor  
R/W Pre-Amp  
HEAD  
Figure 4.2 Circuit configuration  
C141-E218  
4-5  
Theory of Device Operation  
4.4 Power-on Sequence  
Figure 4.3 describes the operation sequence of the disk drive at power-on. The  
outline is described below.  
a) After the power is turned on, the disk drive executes the MPU bus test,  
internal register read/write test, and work RAM read/write test. When the  
self-diagnosis terminates successfully, the disk drive starts the spindle motor.  
b) The disk drive executes self-diagnosis (data buffer read/write test) after  
enabling response to the ATA bus.  
c) After confirming that the spindle motor has reached rated speed, the head  
assembly is loaded on the disk.  
d) The disk drive positions the heads onto the SA area and reads out the system  
information.  
e) The drive becomes ready. The host can issue commands.  
f) The disk drive executes self -calibration. This collects data for VCM torque  
and mechanical external forces applied to the actuator, and updates the  
calibrating value.  
Power-on  
Start  
a)  
Self-diagnosis 1  
- MPU bus test  
- Internal register  
write/read test  
- Work RAM write/read  
test  
The spindle motor starts.  
b)  
c)  
Self-diagnosis 2  
d)  
e)  
- Data buffer write/read  
test  
Initial on-track and read  
out of system information  
Confirming spindle motor  
speed  
Drive ready state  
(command waiting state)  
f)  
Load the head assembly  
Execute self-calibration  
End  
Figure 4.3 Power-on operation sequence  
4-6  
C141-E218  
4.5 Self-calibration  
4.5 Self-calibration  
The disk drive occasionally performs self-calibration in order to sense and  
calibrate mechanical external forces on the actuator, and VCM torque. This  
enables precise seek and read/write operations.  
4.5.1 Self-calibration contents  
(1) Sensing and compensating for external forces  
The actuator suffers from torque due to the FPC forces and winds accompanying  
disk revolution. The torque varies with the disk drive and the cylinder where the  
head is positioned. To execute stable fast seek operations, external forces are  
occasionally sensed.  
The firmware of the drive measures and stores the force (value of the actuator  
motor drive current) that balances the torque for stopping head stably. This  
includes the current offset in the power amplifier circuit and DAC system.  
The forces are compensated by adding the measured value to the specified current  
value to the power amplifier. This makes the stable servo control.  
To compensate torque varying by the cylinder, the disk is divided into 13 areas  
from the innermost to the outermost circumference and the compensating value is  
measured at the measuring cylinder on each area at factory calibration. The  
measured values are stored in the SA cylinder. In the self-calibration, the  
compensating value is updated using the value in the SA cylinder.  
(2) Compensating open loop gain  
Torque constant value of the VCM has dispersion for each drive, and varies  
depending on the cylinder that the head is positioned. To realize the high speed  
seek operation, the value that compensates torque constant value change and loop  
gain change of the whole servo system due to temperature change is measured and  
stored.  
For sensing, the firmware mixes the disturbance signal to the position signal at the  
state that the head is positioned to any cylinder. The firmware calculates the loop  
gain from the position signal and stores the compensation value against to the  
target gain as ratio.  
For compensating, the direction current value to the power amplifier is multiplied  
by the compensation value. By this compensation, loop gain becomes constant  
value and the stable servo control is realized.  
To compensate torque constant value change depending on cylinder, whole  
cylinders from most inner to most outer cylinder are divided into 13 partitions at  
calibration in the factory, and the compensation data is measured for  
representative cylinder of each partition. This measured value is stored in the SA  
area. The compensation value at self-calibration is calculated using the value in  
the SA area.  
C141-E218  
4-7  
Theory of Device Operation  
4.5.2 Execution timing of self-calibration  
Self-calibration is performed once when power is turned on. After that, the disk  
drive does not perform self-calibration until it detects an error.  
That is, self-calibration is performed each time one of the following events occur:  
When it passes from the power on for about 10 seconds except that the disk  
drive shifts to Idle mode, Standby mode, and Sleep mode by execution of any  
commands.  
The number of retries to write or seek data reaches the specified value.  
The error rate of data reading, writing, or seeking becomes lower than the  
specified value.  
4.5.3 Command processing during self-calibration  
This enables the host to execute the command without waiting for a long time,  
even when the disk drive is performing self-calibration. The command execution  
wait time is about maximum 72 ms.  
When the error rate of data reading, writing, or seeking becomes lower than the  
specified value, self-calibration is performed to maintain disk drive stability.  
If the disk drive receives a command execution request from the host while  
performing self-calibration, it stops the self-calibration and starts to execute the  
command. In other words, if a disk read or write service is necessary, the disk  
drive positions the head to the track requested by the host, reads or writes data,  
and then restarts calibration after about 3 seconds.  
If the error rate recovers to a value exceeding the specified value, self-calibration  
is not performed.  
4-8  
C141-E218  
4.6 Read/write Circuit  
4.6 Read/write Circuit  
The read/write circuit consists of the read/write preamplifier (PreAMP), the write  
circuit, the read circuit, and the time base generator in the read channel (RDC).  
Figure 4.4 is a block diagram of the read/write circuit.  
4.6.1 Read/write preamplifier (PreAMP)  
PreAMP equips a read preamplifier and a write current switch, that sets the bias  
current to the MR device and the current in writing. Each channel is connected to  
each data head, and PreAMP switches channel by serial I/O. In the event of any  
abnormalities, including a head short-circuit or head open circuit, the write unsafe  
signal is generated so that abnormal write does not occur.  
4.6.2 Write circuit  
The write data is output from the hard disk controller (HDC) and sent to the RDC.  
The write data is sent to the PreAMP as differential signal, and the data is written  
onto the media.  
(1) Write precompensation  
Write precompensation compensates, during a write process, for write non-  
linearity generated at reading.  
Figure 4.4 Read/write circuit block diagram  
C141-E218  
4-9  
Theory of Device Operation  
4.6.3 Read circuit  
The head read signal from the PreAMP is regulated by the automatic gain control  
(AGC) circuit. Then the output is converted into the sampled read data pulse by  
the programmable filter circuit and the flash digitizer circuit. This signal is  
converted into the read data by the ENDEC circuit based on the read data  
maximum-likelihood-detected by the Viterbi detection circuit.  
(1) AGC circuit  
The AGC circuit automatically regulates the output amplitude to a constant value  
even when the input amplitude level fluctuates. The AGC amplifier output is  
maintained at a constant level even when the head output fluctuates due to the  
head characteristics or outer/inner head positions.  
(2) Programmable filter circuit  
The programmable filter circuit has a low-pass filter function that eliminates  
unnecessary high frequency noise component and a high frequency boost-up  
function that equalizes the waveform of the read signal.  
Cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter and boost-up gain are controlled from the  
register in read channel block. The MPU optimizes the cut-off frequency and  
boost-up gain according to the transfer frequency of each zone.  
Figure 4.5 shows the frequency characteristic sample of the programmable filter.  
-3 dB  
Figure 4.5 Frequency characteristic of programmable filter  
4-10  
C141-E218  
4.6 Read/write Circuit  
(3) FIR circuit  
This circuit is 10-tap sampled analog transversal filter circuit that equalizes the  
head read signal to the Modified Extended Partial Response (MEEPR) waveform.  
(4) A/D converter circuit  
This circuit changes Sampled Read Data Pulse from the FIR circuit into Digital  
Read Data.  
(5) Viterbi detection circuit  
The sample hold waveform output from the flash digitizer circuit is sent to the  
Viterbi detection circuit. The Viterbi detection circuit demodulates data  
according to the survivor path sequence.  
4.6.4 Digital PLL circuit  
The drive uses constant density recording to increase total capacity. This is  
different from the conventional method of recording data with a fixed data  
transfer rate at all data area. In the constant density recording method, data area is  
divided into zones by radius and the data transfer rate is set so that the recording  
density of the inner cylinder of each zone is nearly constant. The drive divides  
data area into 30 zones to set the data transfer rate.  
The MPU sets the data transfer rate setup data (SD/SC) to the RDC that includes  
the Digital PLL circuit to change the data transfer rate.  
C141-E218  
4-11  
Theory of Device Operation  
4.7 Servo Control  
The actuator motor and the spindle motor are submitted to servo control. The  
actuator motor is controlled for moving and positioning the head to the track  
containing the desired data. To turn the disk at a constant velocity, the actuator  
motor is controlled according to the servo data that is written on the data side  
beforehand.  
4.7.1 Servo control circuit  
Figure 4.6 is the block diagram of the servo control circuit. The following  
describes the functions of the blocks:  
(1)  
MPU/HDC/RDC  
SVC  
(3)  
(4)  
Power  
(2)  
Servo  
burst  
capture  
MPU  
core  
DAC  
Head  
VCM current  
Amp  
CSR  
(7)  
Position Sense  
VCM  
(5)  
(6)  
Driver  
Spindle  
motor  
control  
Spindle  
motor  
CSR: Current Sense Resister  
VCM: Voice Coil Motor  
Figure 4.6 Block diagram of servo control circuit  
4-12  
C141-E218  
4.7 Servo Control  
(1) Microprocessor unit (MPU)  
The MPU executes startup of the spindle motor, movement to the reference  
cylinder, seek to the specified cylinder, and calibration operations.  
The main internal operations of the MPU are listed below.  
a. Spindle motor start  
Starts the spindle motor and accelerates it to normal speed when power is  
applied.  
b. Move head to reference cylinder  
Drives the VCM to position the head at the any cylinder in the data area. The  
logical initial cylinder is at the outermost circumference (cylinder 0).  
c. Seek to specified cylinder  
Drives the VCM to position the head to the specified cylinder.  
d. Calibration  
Senses and stores the thermal offset between heads and the mechanical forces  
on the actuator, and stores the calibration value.  
(2) Servo burst capture circuit  
The servo burst capture circuit reproduces signals (position signals) that indicate  
the head position from the servo data on the data surface. From the servo area on  
the data area surface, via the data head, the burst signals of EVEN1, ODD, and  
EVEN2 are output as shown in Figure 4.8 in subsequent to the servo mark, gray  
code that indicates the cylinder position, and index information. The servo  
signals do A/D-convert by Fourier-demodulator in the servo burst capture circuit.  
At that time the AGC circuit is in hold mode. The A/D converted data is  
recognized by the MPU as position information.  
(3) D/A converter (DAC)  
The control program calculates the specified data value (digital value) of the  
VCM drive current, and the value is converted from digital-to-analog so that an  
analog output voltage is sent to the power amplifier.  
(4) Power amplifier  
The power amplifier feeds currents, corresponding to the DAC output signal  
voltage to the VCM.  
(5) Spindle motor control circuit  
The spindle motor control circuit controls the sensor-less spindle motor. A  
spindle driver IC with a built-in PLL(FLL) circuit that is on a hardware unit  
controls the sensor-less spindle motor.  
C141-E218  
4-13  
Theory of Device Operation  
(6) Driver circuit  
The driver circuit is a power amplitude circuit that receives signals from the  
spindle motor control circuit and feeds currents to the spindle motor.  
(7) VCM current sense resistor (CSR)  
This resistor controls current at the power amplifier by converting the VCM  
current into voltage and feeding back.  
4-14  
C141-E218  
4.7 Servo Control  
4.7.2 Data-surface servo format  
Figure 4.7 describes the physical layout of the servo frame. The three areas  
indicated by (1) to (3) in Figure 4.7 are described below.  
(1) Inner guard band  
This area is located inside the user area, and the rotational speed of the VCM can  
be controlled on this cylinder area for head moving.  
(2) Data area  
This area is used as the user data area SA area.  
(3) Outer guard band  
This area is located at outer position of the user data area, and the rotational speed  
of the spindle can be controlled on this cylinder area for head moving.  
C141-E218  
4-15  
Theory of Device Operation  
Servo frame  
(172 servo frames per revolution)  
OGB  
IGB  
Data area  
expand  
CYLn  
CYLn – 1 (n: even number)  
CYLn + 1  
Diameter  
direction  
W/R Recovery  
Servo Mark  
Gray Code  
W/R Recovery  
Servo Mark  
Gray Code  
W/R Recovery  
Servo Mark  
Gray Code  
EVEN1  
ODD  
Circumference  
Direction  
EVEN2  
PAD  
Erase: DC erase  
area  
Figure 4.7 Physical sector servo configuration on disk surface  
4-16  
C141-E218  
4.7 Servo Control  
4.7.3 Servo frame format  
As the servo information, the IDD uses the phase signal servo generated from the  
gray code and servo EVEN and ODD. This servo information is used for  
positioning operation of radius direction and position detection of circumstance  
direction.  
The servo frame consists of 5 blocks; write/read recovery, servo mark, gray code,  
Burst EVEN1, Burst ODD, Burst EVEN2, and PAD. Figure 4.8 shows the servo  
frame format.  
Write/read  
recovery  
Servo  
mark  
Gray code  
Burst  
EVEN1  
Burst  
ODD  
Burst  
EVEN2  
PAD  
Figure 4.8 Servo frame format  
(1) Write/read recovery  
This area is used to absorb the write/read transient and to stabilize the AGC.  
(2) Servo mark  
This area generates a timing for demodulating the gray code and position-  
demodulating the burst signal by detecting the servo mark.  
(3) Gray code (including sector address bits)  
This area is used as cylinder address. The data in this area is converted into the  
binary data by the gray code demodulation circuit  
(4) Burst Even1, Burst Odd, Burst Even2  
This area is used as position signals between tracks and the IDD control so that  
target phase signal is generated from Burst Even and Burst Odd.  
(5) PAD  
This area is used as a gap between servo and data.  
C141-E218  
4-17  
Theory of Device Operation  
4.7.4 Actuator motor control  
The voice coil motor (VCM) is controlled by feeding back the servo data recorded  
on the data surface. The MPU fetches the position sense data on the servo frame  
at a constant interval of sampling time, executes calculation, and updates the  
VCM drive current.  
The servo control of the actuator includes the operation to move the head to the  
reference cylinder, the seek operation to move the head to the target cylinder to  
read or write data, and the track-following operation to position the head onto the  
target track.  
(1) Operation to move the head to the reference cylinder  
The MPU moves the head to the reference cylinder when the power is turned.  
The reference cylinder is in the data area.  
When power is applied the heads are moved from the outside of media to the  
normal servo data zone in the following sequence:  
a) Micro current is fed to the VCM to press the head against the outer direction.  
b) The head is loaded on the disk.  
c) When the servo mark is detected the head is moved slowly toward the inner  
circumference at a constant speed.  
d) If the head is stopped at the reference cylinder from there. Track following  
control starts.  
(2) Seek operation  
Upon a data read/write request from the host, the MPU confirms the necessity of  
access to the disk. If a read/write instruction is issued, the MPU seeks the desired  
track.  
The MPU feeds the VCM current via the D/A converter and power amplifier to  
move the head. The MPU calculates the difference (speed error) between the  
specified target position and the current position for each sampling timing during  
head moving. The MPU then feeds the VCM drive current by setting the  
calculated result into the D/A converter. The calculation is digitally executed by  
the firmware. When the head arrives at the target cylinder, the track is followed.  
(3) Track following operation  
Except during head movement to the reference cylinder and seek operation under  
the spindle rotates in steady speed, the MPU does track following control. To  
position the head at the center of a track, the DSP drives the VCM by feeding  
micro current. For each sampling time, the VCM drive current is determined by  
filtering the position difference between the target position and the position  
clarified by the detected position sense data. The filtering includes servo  
compensation. These are digitally controlled by the firmware.  
4-18  
C141-E218  
4.7 Servo Control  
4.7.5 Spindle motor control  
Hall-less three-phase twelve-pole motor is used for the spindle motor, and the 3-  
phase full/half-wave analog current control circuit is used as the spindle motor  
driver (called SVC hereafter). The firmware operates on the MPU manufactured  
by Fujitsu. The spindle motor is controlled by sending several signals from the  
MPU to the SVC. There are three modes for the spindle control; start mode,  
acceleration mode, and stable rotation mode.  
(1) Start mode  
When power is supplied, the spindle motor is started in the following sequence:  
a) After the power is turned on, the MPU sends a signal to the SVC to charge  
the charge pump capacitor of the SVC. The charged amount defines the  
current that flows in the spindle motor.  
b) When the charge pump capacitor is charged enough, the MPU sets the SVC  
to the motor start mode. Then, a current (approx. 0.3 A) flows into the  
spindle motor.  
c) A phase switching signal is generated and the phase of the current flowed in  
the motor is changed in the order of (V-phase to U-phase), (W-phase to U-  
phase), (W-phase to V-phase), (U-phase to V-phase), (U-phase to W-phase),  
and (V-phase to W-phase) (after that, repeating this order).  
d) During phase switching, the spindle motor starts rotating in low speed, and  
generates a counter electromotive force. The SVC detects this counter  
electromotive force and reports to the MPU using a PHASE signal for speed  
detection.  
e) The MPU is waiting for a PHASE signal. When no phase signal is sent for a  
specific period, the MPU resets the SVC and starts from the beginning.  
When a PHASE signal is sent, the SVC enters the acceleration mode.  
(2) Acceleration mode  
In this mode, the MPU stops to send the phase switching signal to the SVC. The  
SVC starts a phase switching by itself based on the counter electromotive force.  
Then, rotation of the spindle motor accelerates. The MPU calculates a rotational  
speed of the spindle motor based on the PHASE signal from the SVC, and waits  
till the rotational speed reaches 4,200 rpm. When the rotational speed reaches  
4,200 rpm, the SVC enters the stable rotation mode.  
(3) Stable rotation mode  
The SVC builds the FLL/PLL circuit into, and to become the rotational speed of  
the target, controls a stable rotation with hardware.  
The firmware calculates time of one rotation from PHASE signal. PHASE signal  
is outputted from the SVC. And the firmware observes an abnormal rotation.  
C141-E218  
4-19  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
CHAPTER 5 Interface  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
5.5  
5.6  
Physical Interface  
Logical Interface  
Host Commands  
Command Protocol  
Ultra DMA Feature Set  
Timing  
This chapter gives details about the interface, and the interface commands and  
timings.  
C141-E218  
5-1  
Interface  
5.1 Physical Interface  
5.1.1 Interface signals  
Figure 5.1 shows the interface signals.  
Host  
IDD  
DATA 0-15: DATA BUS  
DMACK-: DMA ACKNOWLEDGE  
DMARQ: DMA REQUEST  
INTRO: INTERRUPT REQUEST  
DIOW-: I/O WRITE  
STOP: STOP DURING ULTRA DMA DATA BURSTS  
DIOR-:I/O READ  
HDMARDY:DMA READY DURING ULTRA DMA DATA IN BURSTS  
HSTROBE:DATA STROBE DURING ULTRA DMA DATA OUT BURST  
PDIAG-: PASSED DIAGNOSTICS  
CBLID-: CABLE TYPE IDENTIFIER  
DASP-: DEVICE ACTIVE/SLAVE PRESENT  
IORDY:I/O READY  
DDMARDY:DMA READY DURING ULTRA DMA DATA OUT BURSTS  
DSTROBE: DATA STROBE DURING ULTRA DMA DATA IN BURSTS  
DA 0-2: DEVICE ADDRESS  
CS0-: CHIP SELECT 0  
CS1-: CHIP SELECT 1  
RESET-: RESET  
CSEL: CABLE SELECT  
MSTR: Master  
ENCSEL: ENABLE CSEL  
+5V DC: +5 volt  
GND: GROUND  
Figure 5.1 Interface signals  
5-2  
C141-E218  
5.1 Physical Interface  
5.1.2 Signal assignment on the connector  
Table 5.1 shows the signal assignment on the interface connector.  
Table 5.1 Signal assignment on the interface connector  
Pin No.  
Signal  
Pin No.  
Signal  
A
C
MSTR  
B
D
MSTR/ENCSEL  
ENCSEL  
(KEY)  
PUS-  
E
(KEY)  
F
1
RESET–  
DATA7  
DATA6  
DATA5  
DATA4  
DATA3  
DATA2  
DATA1  
DATA0  
GND  
2
GND  
3
4
DATA8  
DATA9  
DATA10  
DATA11  
DATA12  
DATA13  
DATA14  
DATA15  
(KEY)  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
DMARQ  
GND  
DIOW-, STOP  
GND  
DIOR-, HDMRDY,  
HSTROBE  
GND  
27  
IORDY, DDMARDY,  
DSTROBE  
28  
CSEL  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
DMACK–  
INTRQ  
DA1  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
GND  
Reserved (IOCS16-)  
PDIAG–, CBLID–  
DA2  
DA0  
CS0–  
CS1–  
DASP–  
+5 VDC  
GND  
GND  
+5 VDC  
Unused  
C141-E218  
5-3  
Interface  
[Signal]  
[I/O]  
I
[Description]  
ENCSEL  
This signal is used to set master/slave using the CSEL signal (pin 28).  
Pins B and D  
Open: Sets master/slave using the CSEL signal is  
disabled.  
Short: Sets master/slave using the CSEL signal is  
enabled.  
MSTR-  
I
MSTR, I, Master/slave setting  
Pin A, B, C, D open: Master setting  
Pin A, B Short:  
Slave setting  
PUS-  
I
I
When pin C is grounded, the drive does not spin up at power on.  
RESET-  
Reset signal from the host. This signal is low active and is asserted  
for a minimum of 25 µs during power on.  
DATA 0-15  
I/O Sixteen-bit bi-directional data bus between the host and the device.  
These signals are used for data transfer  
DIOW-  
STOP  
I
I
Signal asserted by the host to write to the device register or data port.  
DIOW- must be negated by the host before starting the Ultra DMA  
transfer. The STOP signal must be negated by the host before data is  
transferred during the Ultra DMA transfer. During data transfer in  
Ultra DMA mode, the assertion of the STOP signal asserted by the  
host later indicates that the transfer has been suspended.  
DIOR-  
I
I
Read strobe signal from the host to read the device register or data  
port  
HDMARDY-  
Flow control signal for Ultra DMA data In transfer (READ DMA  
command). This signal is asserted by the host to inform the device  
that the host is ready to receive the Ultra DMA data In transfer. The  
host can negate the HDMARDY- signal to suspend the Ultra DMA  
data In transfer.  
HSTROBE  
INTRQ  
I
Data Out Strobe signal from the host during Ultra DMA data Out  
transfer (WRITE DMA command). Both the rising and falling edges  
of the HSTROBE signal latch data from Data 15-0 into the device.  
The host can suspend the inversion of the HSTROBE signal to  
suspend the Ultra DMA data Out transfer.  
O
Interrupt signal to the host.  
This signal is negated in the following cases:  
Assertion of RESET- signal  
Reset by SRST of the Device Control register  
Write to the command register by the host  
Read of the status register by the host  
Completion of sector data transfer  
(without reading the Status register)  
The signal output line has a high impedance when no devices are  
selected or interruption is disabled.  
5-4  
C141-E218  
5.1 Physical Interface  
[Signal]  
CS0-  
[I/O]  
I
[Description]  
Chip select signal decoded from the host address bus. This signal  
is used by the host to select the command block registers.  
CS1-  
I
I
-
Chip select signal decoded from the host address bus. This signal  
is used by the host to select the control block registers.  
DA 0-2  
Binary decoded address signals asserted by the host to access task  
file registers.  
KEY  
Key pin for prevention of erroneous connector insertion  
PDIAG-  
I/O This signal is an input mode for the master device and an output  
mode for the slave device in a daisy chain configuration. This  
signal indicates that the slave device has been completed self-  
diagnostics.  
This signal is pulled up to +5 V through 10 kresistor at each device.  
CBLID-  
DASP-  
I/O This signal is used to detect the type of cable installed in the  
system.  
This signal is pulled up to +5 V through 10 kresistor at each device.  
I/O This is a time-multiplexed signal that indicates that the device is  
active and a slave device is present.  
This signal is pulled up to +5 V through 10 kresistor at each device.  
IORDY  
O
O
This signal requests the host system to delay the transfer cycle  
when the device is not ready to respond to a data transfer request  
from the host system.  
DDMARDY-  
Flow control signal for Ultra DMA data Out transfer (WRITE  
DMA command). This signal is asserted by the device to inform  
the host that the device is ready to receive the Ultra DMA data  
Out transfer. The device can negate the DDMARDY- signal to  
suspend the Ultra DMA data Out transfer.  
DSTROBE  
CSEL  
O
I
Data In Strobe signal from the device during Ultra DMA data In  
transfer. Both the rising and falling edges of the DSTROBE  
signal latch data from Data 15-0 into the host. The device can  
suspend the inversion of the DSTROBE signal to suspend the  
Ultra DMA data In transfer.  
This signal to configure the device as a master or a slave device.  
When CSEL signal is grounded, the IDD is a master device.  
When CSEL signal is open, the IDD is a slave device.  
This signal is pulled up with 240 kresistor at each device.  
DMACK-  
I
The host system asserts this signal as a response that the host  
system receives data or to indicate that data is valid.  
C141-E218  
5-5  
Interface  
[Signal]  
[I/O]  
O
[Description]  
DMARQ  
This signal is used for DMA transfer between the host system and  
the device. The device asserts this signal when the device  
completes the preparation of DMA data transfer to the host  
system (at reading) or from the host system (at writing).  
The direction of data transfer is controlled by the DIOR and  
DIOW signals. This signal hand shakes with the DMACK-signal.  
In other words, the device negates the DMARQ signal after the  
host system asserts the DMACK signal. When there is other data  
to be transferred, the device asserts the DMARQ signal again.  
When the DMA data transfer is performed, IOCS16-, CS0- and  
CS1- signals are not asserted. The DMA data transfer is a 16-bit  
data transfer.  
+5 VDC  
GND  
I
-
+5 VDC power supplying to the device.  
Grounded signal at each signal wire.  
Note:  
“I” indicates input signal from the host to the device.  
“O” indicates output signal from the device to the host.  
“I/O” indicates common output or bi-directional signal between the host  
and the device.  
5.2 Logical Interface  
The device can operate for command execution in either address-specified mode;  
cylinder-head-sector (CHS) or Logical block address (LBA) mode. The  
IDENTIFY DEVICE information indicates whether the device supports the LBA  
mode. When the host system specifies the LBA mode by setting bit 6 in the  
Device/Head register to 1, HS3 to HS0 bits of the Device/Head register indicates  
the head No. under the LBA mode, and all bits of the Cylinder High, Cylinder  
Low, and Sector Number registers are LBA bits.  
The sector No. under the LBA mode proceeds in the ascending order with the start  
point of LBA0 (defined as follows).  
LBA0 = [Cylinder 0, Head 0, Sector 1]  
Even if the host system changes the assignment of the CHS mode by the  
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETER command, the sector LBA address is not  
changed.  
LBA = [((Cylinder No.) × (Number of head) + (Head No.)) × (Number of  
sector/track)] + (Sector No.) 1  
5-6  
C141-E218  
5.2 Logical Interface  
5.2.1 I/O registers  
Communication between the host system and the device is done through input-  
output (I/O) registers of the device.  
These I/O registers can be selected by the coded signals, CS0-, CS1-, and DA0 to  
DA2 from the host system. Table 5.2 shows the coding address and the function  
of I/O registers.  
Table 5.2 I/O registers  
I/O registers  
Host I/O  
address  
CS0– CS1–  
DA2  
DA1  
DA0  
Read operation Write operation  
Command block registers  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
Data  
Data  
X’1F0’  
X’1F1’  
X’1F2’  
X’1F3’  
X’1F4’  
X’1F5’  
X’1F6’  
X’1F7’  
Error Register  
Sector Count  
Features  
Sector Count  
L
H
H
L
L
H
L
Sector Number Sector Number  
H
H
H
H
X
Cylinder Low  
Cylinder High  
Device/Head  
Status  
Cylinder Low  
Cylinder High  
Device/Head  
Command  
L
H
L
H
H
X
H
X
(Invalid)  
(Invalid)  
Control block registers  
H
H
L
L
H
H
H
H
L
Alternate Status Device Control  
X’3F6’  
X’3F7’  
H
Notes:  
1.  
The Data register for read or write operation can be accessed by 16 bit data  
bus (DATA0 to DATA15).  
2.  
The registers for read or write operation other than the Data registers can be  
accessed by 8 bit data bus (DATA0 to DATA7).  
3.  
4.  
When reading the Drive Address register, bit 7 is high-impedance state.  
H indicates signal level High and L indicates signal level Low.  
There are two methods for specifying the LBA mode. One method is to  
specify the LBA mode with 28-bit address information, and the other is to  
specify it with 48-bit address information (command of EXT system). If  
the LBA mode is specified with 28-bit address information, the  
C141-E218  
5-7  
Interface  
Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low, Sector Number registers  
indicate LBA bits 27 to 24, bits 23 to 16, bits 15 to 8, and bits 7 to 0,  
respectively.  
If the LBA mode is specified with 48-bit address information, the Cylinder  
High, Cylinder Low, Sector Number registers are set twice. In the first  
time, the registers indicate LBA bits 47 to 40, bits 39 to 32, and bits 31 to  
24, respectively. In the second time, the registers indicate LBA bits 23 to  
16, bits 15 to 8, and bits 7 to 0, respectively.  
5.2.2 Command block registers  
(1) Data register (X’1F0’)  
The Data register is a 16-bit register for data block transfer between the device  
and the host system. Data transfer mode is PIO or DMA mode.  
(2) Error register (X’1F1’)  
The Error register indicates the status of the command executed by the device.  
The contents of this register are valid when the ERR bit of the Status register is 1.  
This register contains a diagnostic code after power is turned on, a reset, or the  
EXECUTIVE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC command is executed.  
[Status at the completion of command execution other than diagnostic command]  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
UNC  
Bit 5  
X
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
X
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
ICRC  
IDNF  
ABRT TK0NF AMNF  
X: Unused  
- Bit 7: Interface CRC Error (ICRC). This bit indicates that a CRC error  
occurred during Ultra DMA transfer.  
- Bit 6: Uncorrectable Data Error (UNC). This bit indicates that an  
uncorrectable data error has been encountered.  
- Bit 5: Unused  
- Bit 4: ID Not Found (IDNF). This bit indicates an error except for bad  
sector, uncorrectable error and SB not found.  
- Bit 3: Unused  
- Bit 2: Aborted Command (ABRT). This bit indicates that the requested  
command was aborted due to a device status error (e.g. Not Ready,  
Write Fault) or the command code was invalid.  
5-8  
C141-E218  
5.2 Logical Interface  
- Bit 1: Track 0 Not Found (TK0NF). This bit indicates that track 0 was not  
found during RECALIBRATE command execution.  
- Bit 0: Address Mark Not Found (AMNF). This bit indicates that the SB Not  
Found error occurred.  
[Diagnostic code]  
X’01’: No Error Detected.  
X’02’: HDC Diagnostic Error  
X’03’: Data Buffer Diagnostic Error.  
X’04’: Memory Diagnostic Error.  
X’05’: Reading the system area is abnormal.  
X’06’: Calibration is abnormal.  
X’80’: Device 1 (slave device) Failed.  
Error register of the master device is valid under two devices (master  
and slave) configuration. If the slave device fails, the master device  
posts X’80’ OR (the diagnostic code) with its own status (X’01’ to  
X’06’).  
However, when the host system selects the slave device, the diagnostic  
code of the slave device is posted.  
(3) Features register (X’1F1’)  
The Features register provides specific feature to a command. For instance, it is  
used with SET FEATURES command to enable or disable caching.  
(4) Sector Count register (X’1F2’)  
The Sector Count register indicates the number of sectors of data to be transferred  
in a read or write operation between the host system and the device. When the  
value in this register is X’00’, the sector count is 256. With the EXT system  
command, the sector count is 65536 when value of this register is X'00' in the first  
setting and X'00' in the second setting.  
When this register indicates X’00’ at the completion of the command execution,  
this indicates that the command is completed successfully. If the command is not  
completed successfully, this register indicates the number of sectors to be  
transferred to complete the request from the host system. That is, this register  
indicates the number of remaining sectors that the data has not been transferred  
due to the error.  
The contents of this register have other definition for the following commands;  
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS, SET FEATURES, IDLE, STANDBY and  
SET MULTIPLE MODE.  
C141-E218  
5-9  
Interface  
(5) Sector Number register (X’1F3’)  
The contents of this register indicate the starting sector number for the subsequent  
command. The sector number should be between X’01’ and [the number of  
sectors per track defined by INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command.  
Under the LBA mode, this register indicates LBA bits 7 to 0.  
Under the LBA mode of the EXT system command, LBA bits 31 to 24 are set in  
the first setting, and LBA bits 7 to 0 are set in the second setting.  
(6) Cylinder Low register (X’1F4’)  
The contents of this register indicate low-order 8 bits of the starting cylinder  
address for any disk-access.  
At the end of a command, the contents of this register are updated to the current  
cylinder number.  
Under the LBA mode, this register indicates LBA bits 15 to 8.  
Under the LBA mode of the EXT system command, LBA bits 39 to 32 are set in  
the first setting, and LBA bits 15 to 8 are set in the second setting.  
(7) Cylinder High register (X’1F5’)  
The contents of this register indicate high-order 8 bits of the disk-access start  
cylinder address.  
At the end of a command, the contents of this register are updated to the current  
cylinder number. The high-order 8 bits of the cylinder address are set to the  
Cylinder High register.  
Under the LBA mode, this register indicates LBA bits 23 to 16.  
Under the LBA mode of the EXT system command, LBA bits 47 to 40 are set in  
the first setting, and LBA bits 23 to 16 are set in the second setting.  
5-10  
C141-E218  
5.2 Logical Interface  
(8) Device/Head register (X’1F6’)  
The contents of this register indicate the device and the head number.  
When executing INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command, the contents  
of this register defines “the number of heads minus 1” (a maximum head No.).  
Bit 7  
X
Bit 6  
L
Bit 5  
X
Bit 4  
DEV  
Bit 3  
HS3  
Bit 2  
HS2  
Bit 1  
HS1  
Bit 0  
HS0  
- Bit 7: Unused  
- Bit 6: L. 0 for CHS mode and 1 for LBA mode.  
- Bit 5: Unused  
- Bit 4: DEV bit. 0 for the master device and 1 for the slave device.  
- Bit 3: HS3 CHS mode head address 3 (23). bit 27 for LBA mode. Unused  
under the LBA mode of the EXT command.  
- Bit 2: HS2 CHS mode head address 2 (22). bit 26 for LBA mode. Unused  
under the LBA mode of the EXT command.  
- Bit 1: HS1 CHS mode head address 1 (21). bit 25 for LBA mode. Unused  
under the LBA mode of the EXT command.  
- Bit 0: HS0 CHS mode head address 0 (20). bit 24 for LBA mode. Unused  
under the LBA mode of the EXT command.  
(9) Status register (X’1F7’)  
The contents of this register indicate the status of the device. The contents of this  
register are updated at the completion of each command. When the BSY bit is  
cleared, other bits in this register should be validated within 400 ns. When the  
BSY bit is 1, other bits of this register are invalid. When the host system reads  
this register while an interrupt is pending, it is considered to be the Interrupt  
Acknowledge (the host system acknowledges the interrupt). Any pending  
interrupt is cleared (negating INTRQ signal) whenever this register is read.  
Bit 7  
BSY  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
DF  
Bit 4  
DSC  
Bit 3  
DRQ  
Bit 2  
0
Bit 1  
0
Bit 0  
ERR  
DRDY  
C141-E218  
5-11  
Interface  
- Bit 7: Busy (BSY) bit. This bit is set whenever the Command register is  
accessed. Then this bit is cleared when the command is completed.  
However, even if a command is being executed, this bit is 0 while data  
transfer is being requested (DRQ bit = 1). When BSY bit is 1, the host  
system should not write the command block registers. If the host  
system reads any command block register when BSY bit is 1, the  
contents of the Status register are posted. This bit is set by the device  
under following conditions:  
(a) Within 400 ns after RESET- is negated or SRST is set in the  
Device Control register, the BSY bit is set. The BSY bit is  
cleared, when the reset process is completed.  
The BSY bit is set for no longer than 15 seconds after the IDD  
accepts reset.  
(b) Within 400 ns from the host system starts writing to the  
Command register.  
(c) Within 5 µs following transfer of 512 bytes data during execution  
of the READ SECTOR(S), WRITE SECTOR(S), or WRITE  
BUFFER command.  
- Bit 6: Device Ready (DRDY) bit. This bit indicates that the device is  
capable to respond to a command.  
The IDD checks its status when it receives a command. If an error is  
detected (not ready state), the IDD clears this bit to 0. This is cleared  
to 0 at power-on and it is cleared until the rotational speed of the  
spindle motor reaches the steady speed.  
- Bit 5: The Device Write Fault (DF) bit. This bit indicates that a device fault  
(write fault) condition has been detected.  
If a write fault is detected during command execution, this bit is  
latched and retained until the device accepts the next command or  
reset.  
- Bit 4: Device Seek Complete (DSC) bit. This bit indicates that the device  
heads are positioned over a track.  
In the IDD, this bit is always set to 1 after the spin-up control is  
completed.  
- Bit 3: Data Request (DRQ) bit. This bit indicates that the device is ready to  
transfer data of word unit or byte unit between the host system and the  
device.  
- Bit 2: Always 0.  
- Bit 1: Always 0.  
- Bit 0: Error (ERR) bit. This bit indicates that an error was detected while the  
previous command was being executed. The Error register indicates  
the additional information of the cause for the error.  
5-12  
C141-E218  
5.2 Logical Interface  
(10) Command register (X’1F7’)  
The Command register contains a command code being sent to the device. After  
this register is written, the command execution starts immediately.  
Table 5.3 lists the executable commands and their command codes. This table  
also lists the necessary parameters for each command which are written to certain  
registers before the Command register is written.  
5.2.3 Control block registers  
(1) Alternate Status register (X’3F6’)  
The Alternate Status register contains the same information as the Status register  
of the command block register.  
The only difference from the Status register is that a read of this register does not  
imply Interrupt Acknowledge and INTRQ signal is not reset.  
Bit 7  
BSY  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
DF  
Bit 4  
DSC  
Bit 3  
DRQ  
Bit 2  
0
Bit 1  
0
Bit 0  
ERR  
DRDY  
C141-E218  
5-13  
Interface  
(2) Device Control register (X’3F6’)  
The Device Control register contains device interrupt and software reset.  
Bit 7  
HOB  
Bit 6  
X
Bit 5  
X
Bit 4  
X
Bit 3  
X
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
nIEN  
Bit 0  
0
SRST  
- Bit 7: High Order Byte (HOB) is the selector bit that selects higher-order  
information or lower-order information of the EXT system command.  
If HOB = 1, LBA bits 47 to 24 and the higher-order 8 bits of the sector  
count are displayed in the task register.  
If HOB = 0, LBA bits 23 to 0 and the lower-order 8 bits of the sector  
count are displayed in the task register.  
- Bit 2: Software Reset (SRST) is the host software reset bit. When this bit is  
set, the device is held reset state. When two devices are daisy chained  
on the interface, setting this bit resets both devices simultaneously.  
The slave device is not required to execute the DASP- handshake.  
- Bit 1: nIEN bit enables an interrupt (INTRQ signal) from the device to the  
host. When this bit is 0 and the device is selected, an interruption  
(INTRQ signal) can be enabled through a tri-state buffer. When this  
bit is 1 or the device is not selected, the INTRQ signal is in the high-  
impedance state.  
5.3 Host Commands  
The host system issues a command to the device by writing necessary parameters  
in related registers in the command block and writing a command code in the  
Command register.  
The device can accept the command when the BSY bit is 0 (the device is not in  
the busy status).  
The host system can halt the uncompleted command execution only at execution  
of hardware or software reset.  
When the BSY bit is 1 or the DRQ bit is 1 (the device is requesting the data  
transfer) and the host system writes to the command register, the correct device  
operation is not guaranteed.  
5.3.1 Command code and parameters  
Table 5.3 lists the supported commands, command code and the registers that  
needed parameters are written.  
5-14  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Table 5.3 Command code and parameters (1 of 2)  
COMMAND CODE (Bit)  
PARAMETER USED  
COMMAND NAME  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FR SC SN CY DH  
RECALIBRATE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
X
0
X
0
X
0
X
R
R
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
D
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
READ SECTOR(S)  
WRITE SECTOR(S)  
WRITE VERIFY  
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)  
SEEK  
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
R
X
X
X
X
EXECUTE DEVICE  
DIAGNOSTIC  
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
N
N
N
N
D*  
INITIALIZE DEVICE  
PARAMETERS  
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
N
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
Y
D
D
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE  
STANDBY IMMEDIATE  
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
IDLE IMMEDIATE  
UNLOAD IMMEDIATE  
STANDBY  
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
D
D
D
D
D
D
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
IDLE  
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
CHECK POWER MODE  
SLEEP  
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
SMART  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
D
D
Y
Y
D
Y
Y
DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
READ MULTIPLE  
WRITE MULTIPLE  
SET MULTIPLE MODE  
READ DMA  
0
1
0
R
R
WRITE DMA  
C141-E218  
5-15  
Interface  
Table 5.3 Command code and parameters (2 of 2)  
COMMAND CODE (Bit) PARAMETER USED  
FR SC SN CY DH  
COMMAND NAME  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
READ BUFFER  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N*  
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
FLUSH CACHE  
WRITE BUFFER  
IDENTIFY DEVICE  
IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA  
SET FEATURES  
SECURITY SET PASSWORD  
SECURITY UNLOCK  
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE  
SECURITY ERASE UNIT  
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK  
SECURITY DISABLE  
PASSWORD  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
D
D
READ NATIVE MAX  
ADDRESS  
SET MAX  
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
Y
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
D
D
READ SECTOR(S) EXT  
READ DMA EXT  
*O  
*O  
READ NATIVE MAX  
ADDRESS EXT  
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
N
N
N
N
D
*O  
*O  
*O  
READ MULTIPLE EXT  
READ LOG EXT  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
D
D
D
D
Y
D
D
D
WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT *O  
WRITE DMA EXT *O  
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT *O  
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT  
WRITE DMA FUA EXT  
WRITE LOG EXT  
*O  
*O  
*O  
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)  
EXT  
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
N
Y
Y
Y
D
*O  
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT  
*O  
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
N
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
D
D
FLUSH CACHE EXT  
*O  
5-16  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Note: READ LONG (0x22) command/WRITE LONG (0x33) command became  
a unsupport from the MHV2xxxAT series.  
Notes:  
FR: Features Register  
CY: Cylinder Registers  
SC: Sector Count Register  
DH: Drive/Head Register  
SN: Sector Number Register  
R:  
Retry at error  
1 = Without retry  
0 = With retry  
Y:  
Necessary to set parameters  
Y*: Necessary to set parameters under the LBA mode.  
N: Not necessary to set parameters (The parameter is ignored if it is set.)  
N*: May set parameters  
D: The device parameter is valid, and the head parameter is ignored.  
*O: Option (customizing)  
D*: The command is addressed to the master device, but both the master device  
and the slave device execute it.  
X:  
Do not care  
C141-E218  
5-17  
Interface  
5.3.2 Command descriptions  
The contents of the I/O registers to be necessary for issuing a command and the  
example indication of the I/O registers at command completion are shown as  
following in this subsection.  
Example: READ SECTOR(S)  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
0
x
0
1
x
L
DV Head No. / LBA [MSB]  
Start cylinder address [MSB] / LBA  
Start cylinder address [LSB] / LBA  
Start sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
Transfer sector count  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
L
x
DV Head No. / LBA [MSB]  
End cylinder address [MSB] / LBA  
End cylinder address [LSB] / LBA  
End sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
X’00’  
Error information  
CM: Command register  
DH: Device/Head register  
FR: Features register  
ST: Status register  
CH: Cylinder High register ER: Error register  
CL: Cylinder Low register  
L: LBA (logical block address) setting bit  
SN: Sector Number register DV: Device address. bit  
SC: Sector Count register  
x, xx: Do not care (no necessary to set)  
5-18  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Note:  
1.  
When the L bit is specified to 1, the lower 4 bits of the DH register and all  
bits of the CH, CL and SN registers indicate the LBA bits (bits of the DH  
register are the MSB (most significant bit) and bits of the SN register are  
the LSB (least significant bit).  
2.  
3.  
At error occurrence, the SC register indicates the remaining sector count of data  
transfer.  
In the table indicating I/O registers contents in this subsection, bit indication is  
omitted.  
C141-E218  
5-19  
Interface  
(1) RECALIBRATE (X’10’ to X’1F’)  
This command performs the calibration. Upon receipt of this command, the  
device sets BSY bit of the Status register and performs a calibration. When the  
device completes the calibration, the device updates the Status register, clears the  
BSY bit, and generates an interrupt.  
This command can be issued in the LBA mode.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
0
x
0
x
0
x
1
x
x
x
x
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
Note:  
Also executable in LBA mode.  
5-20  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(2) READ SECTOR(S) (X’20’ or X’21’)  
This command reads data of sectors specified in the Sector Count register from  
the address specified in the Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low and  
Sector Number registers. Number of sectors can be specified from 1 to 256  
sectors. To specify 256 sectors reading, ‘00’ is specified. For the DRQ, INTRQ,  
and BSY protocols related to data transfer, see Subsection 5.4.1.  
If the head is not on the track specified by the host, the device performs an  
implied seek. After the head reaches to the specified track, the device reads the  
target sector.  
If an error occurs, retry reads are attempted to read the target sector before  
reporting an error, irrespective of the R bit setting.  
The DRQ bit of the Status register is always set prior to the data transfer  
regardless of an error condition.  
Upon the completion of the command execution, command block registers  
contain the cylinder, head, and sector addresses (in the CHS mode) or logical  
block address (in the LBA mode) of the last sector read.  
If an unrecoverable error occurs in a sector, the read operation is terminated at the  
sector where the error occurred. Command block registers contain the cylinder, the  
head, and the sector addresses of the sector (in the CHS mode) or the logical block  
address (in the LBA mode) where the error occurred, and remaining number of  
sectors of which data was not transferred.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
0
x
0
1
x
0
0
0
0
R
L
DV StartheadNo. /LBA  
[MSB]  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Start sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
Transfer sector count  
xx  
C141-E218  
5-21  
Interface  
(R: Retry)  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
L
x
DV End head No. / LBA [MSB]  
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
End sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
00 (*1)  
Error information  
*1  
If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining number of  
sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this register.  
5-22  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(3) WRITE SECTOR(S) (X’30’ or X’31’)  
This command writes data of sectors from the address specified in the  
Device/Head, Cylinder High, Cylinder Low, and Sector Number registers to the  
address specified in the Sector Count register. Number of sectors can be specified  
from 1 to 256 sectors. A sector count of 0 requests 256 sectors. Data transfer  
begins at the sector specified in the Sector Number register. For the DRQ,  
INTRQ, and BSY protocols related to data transfer, see Subsection 5.4.2.  
If the head is not on the track specified by the host, the device performs an  
implied seek. After the head reaches to the specified track, the device writes the  
target sector.  
If an error occurs when writing to the target sector, retries are attempted  
irrespectively of the R bit setting.  
The data stored in the buffer, and CRC code and ECC bytes are written to the data  
field of the corresponding sector(s). Upon the completion of the command  
execution, the command block registers contain the cylinder, head, and sector  
addresses of the last sector written.  
If an error occurs during multiple sector write operation, the write operation is  
terminated at the sector where the error occurred. Command block registers  
contain the cylinder, the head, the sector addresses (in the CHS mode) or the  
logical block address (in the LBA mode) of the sector where the error occurred.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
0
x
0
1
x
1
0
0
0
R
L
DV StartheadNo. /LBA[MSB]  
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Start sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
Transfer sector count  
xx  
C141-E218  
5-23  
Interface  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
Status information  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
x
L
x
DV End head No. / LBA [MSB]  
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
End sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
00 (*1)  
Error information  
*1  
If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining number of  
sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this register.  
5-24  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(4) WRITE VERIFY (X’3C’)  
This command operates similarly to the WRITE SECTOR(S) command except  
that the device verifies each sector immediately after being written. The verify  
operation is a read and check for data errors without data transfer. Any error that  
is detected during the verify operation is posted.  
After all sectors are verified, the last interruption (INTRQ for command  
termination) is generated.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
0
x
0
1
x
1
1
1
0
0
L
DV StartheadNo. /LBA  
[MSB]  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Start sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
Transfer sector count  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
L
x
DV EndheadNo. /LBA[MSB]  
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
End sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
00 (*1)  
Error information  
*1  
If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining number of  
sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this register.  
C141-E218  
5-25  
Interface  
(5) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) (X’40’ or X’41’)  
This command operates similarly to the READ SECTOR(S) command except that  
the data is not transferred to the host system.  
After all requested sectors are verified, the device clears the BSY bit of the Status  
register and generates an interrupt. Upon the completion of the command  
execution, the command block registers contain the cylinder, head, and sector  
number of the last sector verified.  
If an unrecoverable error occurs, the verify operation is terminated at the sector  
where the error occurred. The command block registers contain the cylinder, the  
head, and the sector addresses (in the CHS mode) or the logical block address (in  
the LBA mode) of the sector where the error occurred. The Sector Count register  
indicates the number of sectors that have not been verified.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
0
x
1
0
x
0
0
0
0
R
L
DV StartheadNo. /LBA[MSB]  
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Start sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
Transfer sector count  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST) Status information  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
x
L
x
DV End head No. / LBA [MSB]  
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
End sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
00 (*1)  
Error information  
*1  
If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining number of  
sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this register.  
5-26  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(6) SEEK (X’70’ to X’7F’)  
This command performs a seek operation to the track and selects the head  
specified in the command block registers. After completing the seek operation,  
the device clears the BSY bit in the Status register and generates an interrupt.  
In the LBA mode, this command performs the seek operation to the cylinder and  
head position in which the sector is specified with the logical block address.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
0
x
1
1
x
1
x
x
x
x
L
DV Head No. / LBA [MSB]  
Cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
L
x
DV Head No. / LBA [MSB]  
Cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
xx  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-27  
Interface  
(7) EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC (X’90’)  
This command performs an internal diagnostic test (self-diagnosis) of the device.  
This command usually sets the DRV bit of the Drive/Head register is to 0  
(however, the DV bit is not checked). If two devices are present, both devices  
execute self-diagnosis.  
If device 1 is present:  
Both devices shall execute self-diagnosis.  
The device 0 waits for up to 6 seconds until device 1 asserts the PDIAG-  
signal.  
If the device 1 does not assert the PDIAG- signal but indicates an error, the  
device 0 shall append X’80’ to its own diagnostic status.  
The device 0 clears the BSY bit of the Status register and generates an  
interrupt. (The device 1 does not generate an interrupt.)  
A diagnostic status of the device 0 is read by the host system. When a  
diagnostic failure of the device 1 is detected, the host system can read a status  
of the device 1 by setting the DV bit (selecting the device 1).  
When device 1 is not present:  
The device 0 posts only the results of its own self-diagnosis.  
The device 0 clears the BSY bit of the Status register, and generates an  
interrupt.  
Table 5.4 lists the diagnostic code written in the Error register which is 8-bit code.  
If the device 1 fails the self-diagnosis, the device 0 “ORs” X’80’ with its own  
status and sets that code to the Error register.  
Table 5.4 Diagnostic code  
Code  
Result of diagnostic  
No error detected.  
X’01’  
X’02’  
X’03’  
X’04’  
X’05’  
X’06’  
X’8x’  
HDC diagnostic error  
Data buffer diagnostic error  
Memory diagnostic error  
Reading the system area is abnormal  
Calibration abnormal  
Failure of device 1  
5-28  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
attention: The device responds to this command with the result of power-on  
diagnostic test.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
0
x
0
x
1
0
0
0
0
DV  
Head No. /LBA [MSB]  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
x
x
DV  
Head No. /LBA [MSB]  
xx  
01H  
01H  
Diagnostic code  
C141-E218  
5-29  
Interface  
(8) INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (X’91’)  
The host system can set the number of sectors per track and the maximum head  
number (maximum head number is “number of heads minus 1”) per cylinder with  
this command. Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the BSY bit of  
Status register and saves the parameters. Then the device clears the BSY bit and  
generates an interrupt.  
When the SC register is specified to X’00’, an ABORTED COMMAND error is  
posted. Other than X’00’ is specified, this command terminates normally.  
The parameters set by this command are retained even after reset or power save  
operation regardless of the setting of disabling the reverting to default setting.  
The device ignores the L bit specification and operates with only CHS mode  
specification.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
0
x
0
x
1
0
0
0
1
DV Max. head No.  
xx  
xx  
xx  
Number of sectors/track  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV Max. head No.  
Number of sectors/track  
Error information  
5-30  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(9) DOWNLOAD MICROCODE (X’92’)  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(FR)  
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
X
DV  
00  
00  
Sector count (15-8)  
Sector count (7-0)  
Subcommand code  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(ER)  
Status information  
DV  
1
X
1
0
0
0
0
00  
00  
XX  
XX  
Error information  
This command rewrites the microcode of the device (firmware).  
When this command is accepted, the device does beginning the data transfer of  
the microcode or the microcode rewriting according to Subcommand code  
(Rewriting is also possible simultaneously with the data transfer). Refer to Table  
5-5.  
In the data transfer of Subcommand code:01h, transfer by which data is divided  
into multiple times is possible. Refer to Table 5-6.  
After the designation of rewriting by Subcommand code:07h, reactivates in the  
device for the update of the rewriting microcode of the microcode.  
C141-E218  
5-31  
Interface  
Table 5.5 Operation of DOWNLOAD MICROCODE  
Host Command  
Subcommand code  
Movement of device  
Sector count  
(SN, SC Reg)  
Data transfer  
Microcode rewriting execution  
(FR Reg)  
0000h  
xxxxh  
0000h  
xxxxh  
Non  
It is.  
Non  
It is.  
Rewriting execution reservation  
Rewriting execution reservation  
Execution. **  
01h  
07h  
Execution. **  
Excluding 01h and 07h  
Abort  
**: In the following cases, Subcommand code=07h returns Abort as an error  
though becomes Microcode rewriting execution specification.  
1) Abnormality of the transmitted Microcode data is detected.  
2) The data transfer is not done (The number of transfer: 0).  
3) "DOWNLOAD MICROCODE" The command is not continuously issued.  
Table 5.6 Example of rewriting procedure of data 512 KBytes (40000h Bytes) of  
microcode  
Transfer example 1:  
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh  
2) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh  
3) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh  
4) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh  
5) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0000h FR = 07h  
Transfer example 2:  
Transfer of 127 KB (0 to 127 K) from the first  
Transfer from 128 to 255 KB  
Transfer from 256 to 383 KB  
Transfer from 384 to 511 KB  
Firmware rewriting execution  
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0400h FR = 0lh  
Transfer of 512 KB  
2) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0000h FR = 07h Firmware rewriting execution  
Transfer example 3:  
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0400h FR = 07h Transfer of 512 KB and Firmware rewriting  
execution  
Transfer example 4:  
1) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh  
2) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh  
3) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 0lh  
Transfer of 127 KB (0 to 127 K) from the first  
Transfer from 128 to 255 KB  
Transfer from 256 to 383 KB  
4) CMD = 92h SN, SC = 0100h FR = 07h Transfer from 384 to 511 KB and Firmware  
rewriting execution  
When the data of the transfer microcode did the rewriting specification with the  
illegality and the data transfer not done or the DOWNLOAD MICROCODE  
command is not continuously issued, reports on the Aborted Command error.  
5-32  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(10) STANDBY IMMEDIATE (X’94’ or X’E0’)  
Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the BSY bit of the Status register  
and enters the standby mode. The device then clears the BSY bit and generates an  
interrupt. This command does not support the APS timer function.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
X’94’ or X’E0’  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-33  
Interface  
(11) IDLE IMMEDIATE (X’95’ or X’E1’) / UNLOAD IMMEDIATE (X’E1’)  
Default function  
Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the BSY bit of the Status register,  
and enters the idle mode. Then, the device clears the BSY bit, and generates an  
interrupt. This command does not support the APS timer function.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
X’95’ or X’E1’  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
Unload Feature (Unload Immediate Command):  
When the device received the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with the UNLOAD  
FEATURE, the head(s) is unloaded to the ramp position. After the device  
completed the unload operation, the INTRQ signal will be asserted and the BUSY  
flag will be cleared. The time until the head(s) unload to the ramp position is  
typically less than 500 milliseconds. This unload operation is not same as the  
power management operation. The device just unloads the head(s), and not  
executes the power consumption restraint operation. This unload operation effects  
the normal (not emergency) load/unload guarantee count per the device life.  
5-34  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Even if the device executes reading look-ahead operation or executes writing  
operation, the device unloads the head(s) to the ramp position as soon as possible  
when received the IDLE IMMEDIATE command with the Unload Feature. When  
the writing operation is stopped, the device keeps the unwritten data. And, the  
device keeps the unloaded state until receiving a Soft / Hard Reset, or a new  
command except IDLE IMMEDIATE command with the Unload Feature.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
X’E1’  
x
x
x
DV xx  
X’55’  
X’4E’  
X’4C’  
xx  
X’44’  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST) Status information  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
x
x
x
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
X’C4’  
xx  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-35  
Interface  
(12) STANDBY (X’96’ or X’E2’)  
Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the BSY bit of the Status register  
and enters the standby mode. The device then clears the BSY bit and generates an  
interrupt. If the device has already spun down, the spin-down sequence is not  
implemented.  
By using this command, the APS (Automatic Power Standby) timer function is  
enabled and the timer starts the countdown when the device returns to the state  
which is waiting Host Command. If the device has not received any command  
during specified period, then the device enters standby mode automatically.  
Under the standby mode, the spindle motor is stopped. Thus, when the command  
involving a seek such as READ SECTOR(s) command is received, the device  
processes the command after driving the spindle motor.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
X’96’ or X’E2’  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Period of timer  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-36  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(13) IDLE (X’97’ or X’E3’)  
Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the BSY bit of the Status register,  
and enters the idle mode. Then, the device clears the BSY bit, and generates an  
interrupt. The device generates interrupt even if the device has not fully entered  
the idle mode. If the spindle of the device is already rotating, the spin-up sequence  
shall not be implemented.  
By using this command, the APS (Automatic Power Standby) timer function is  
enabled and the timer immediately starts the countdown. When the timer reaches  
the specified value, the device enters standby mode. The APS timer is set to  
prohibition if the Sector Count register's value was "00h" when device has  
received this command.  
The APS timer allows the device to change to the standby mode automatically  
after specified period. When the device enters the state which is waiting Host  
Command, the timer starts countdown. If any command is not issued while the  
timer is counting down, the device automatically enters the standby mode. If any  
command is issued while the timer is counting down, the timer is initialized and  
the command is executed. The timer restarts countdown after completion of the  
command execution.  
The period of timer count is set depending on the value of the Sector Count  
register as shown below.  
Sector Count register value  
[X’00’]  
Point of timer  
Timeout disabled  
0
1 to 240  
[X’01’ to X’F0’]  
(Value × 5) seconds  
((Value-240) × 30) min  
21 minutes  
241 to 251 [X’F1’ to X’FB’]  
252  
253  
[X’FC’]  
[X’FD’]  
8 hrs  
254 to 255 [X’FE’ to X’FF’]  
21 minutes 15 seconds  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM) X’97’ or X’E3’  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Period of timer  
xx  
C141-E218  
5-37  
Interface  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-38  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(14) CHECK POWER MODE (X’98’ or X’E5’)  
The host checks the power mode of the device with this command.  
The host system can confirm the power save mode of the device by the contents  
of the Sector Count register.  
The device sets the BSY bit and sets the following register value. After that, the  
device clears the BSY bit and generates an interrupt.  
Power save mode  
Sector Count register  
• During moving to Standby mode  
• Standby mode  
X’00’  
X’FF’  
X’FF’  
• Idle mode  
• Active mode  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM) X’98’ or X’E5’  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
x
x
x
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
X’00’ or X’FF’  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-39  
Interface  
(15) SLEEP (X’99’ or X’E6’)  
This command is the only way to make the device enter the sleep mode.  
Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the BSY bit of the Status register  
and enters the sleep mode. The device then clears the BSY bit and generates an  
interrupt. The device generates an interrupt even if the device has not fully  
entered the sleep mode.  
In the sleep mode, the spindle motor is stopped and the ATA interface section is  
inactive. All I/O register outputs are in high-impedance state.  
The only way to release the device from sleep mode is to execute a software or  
hardware reset.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
X’99’ or X’E6’  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-40  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(16) SMART (X’B0)  
This command predicts the occurrence of device failures depending on the  
subcommand specified in the FR register. If the FR register contains values that  
are not supported with the command, the Aborted Command error is issued.  
Before issuing the command, the host must set the key values in the CL and CH  
registers (4Fh in the CL register and C2h in the CH register). If the key values  
are incorrect, the Aborted Command error is issued.  
If the failure prediction function is disabled, the device returns the Aborted  
Command error to subcommands other than those of the SMART Enable  
Operations (with the FR register set to D8h).  
If the failure prediction function is enabled, the device collects and updates data  
on specific items. The values of items whose data is collected and updated by the  
device in order to predict device failures are hereinafter referred to as attribute  
values.  
C141-E218  
5-41  
Interface  
Table 5.7 Features register values (subcommands) and functions (1 of 3)  
Features Resister  
X’D0’  
Function  
SMART READ DATE:  
A device that received this subcommand asserts the BSY bit and saves all  
the updated attribute values. The device then clears the BSY bit and  
transfers 512-byte attribute value information to the host.  
* For information about the format of the attribute value information, see  
Table 5.8.  
X’D1’  
X’D2’  
SMART READ ATTRIBUTE THRESHOLDS:  
This subcommand is used to transfer 512-byte insurance failure threshold  
value data to the host.  
* For information about the format of the insurance failure threshold value  
data, see Table 5.9.  
SMART ENABLE/DISABLE ATTRIBUTE AUTOSAVE:  
Enables (by setting the SC register to a value other than 00h) or disables (by  
setting the SC register to 00h) a function that automatically saves device  
attribute values (“automatic attribute save function”). This setting is held  
regardless of whether the device is turned on or off. If the automatic  
attribute save function is enabled and more than 15 minutes has elapsed  
since the last time that attributes were saved, then the attributes are saved.  
However, if the automatic attribute save function is disabled, the attributes  
are not saved. Upon receiving this subcommand, a device asserts BSY,  
enables or disables the automatic attribute save function, and clears BSY.  
X’D3’  
X’D4’  
SMART SAVE ATTRIBUTE VALUES:  
When the device receives this subcommand, it asserts the BSY bit, saves  
device attribute value data, and then clears the BSY bit.  
SMART EXECUTIVE OFF-LINE IMMEDIATE:  
A device which receives this command asserts the BSY bit, then starts  
collecting the off-line data specified in the SN register, or stops.  
In the off-line mode, after BSY is cleared, off-line data are collected. In the  
captive mode, it collects off-line data with the BSY assertion as is, then  
clears the BSY when collection of data is completed.  
SN Off-line data collection mode  
00h: Off-line diagnosis (off-line mode)  
01h: Simple self-test (off-line mode)  
02h: Comprehensive self-test (off-line mode)  
03h: Conveyance self-test (off-line mode)  
04h: Selective self-test (off-line mode)  
7Fh: Self-test stop  
81h: Simple self-test (captive mode)  
82h: Comprehensive self-test (captive mode)  
83h: Conveyance self-test (captive mode)  
84h: Selective self-test (captive mode)  
5-42  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Table 5.7 Features register values (subcommands) and functions (2 of 3)  
Features Resister  
X’D5’  
Function  
SMART READ LOG:  
A device which receives this sub-command asserts the BSY bit, then reads  
the log sector specified in the SN register. Next, it clears the BSY bit and  
transmits the log sector to the host computer.  
SN:  
SC:  
Log sector  
00h:  
01h:  
02h:  
06h:  
09h:  
01h:  
01h:  
33h:  
01h:  
01h:  
SMART log directory  
SMART summary error log  
SMART comprehensive error log  
SMART self-test log  
SMART selective self-test log  
80h-9Fh: 01h-10h: Host vendor log  
* See Table 5.16 concerning the SMART error log data format.  
See Table 5.18 concerning the SMART self-test log data format.  
See Table 5.19 concerning the SMART selective self-test log data  
format.  
X’D6’  
SMART WRITE LOG:  
A device which receives this sub-command asserts the BSY bit and when it  
has prepared to receive data from the host computer, it sets DRQ and clears  
the BSY bit. Next, it receives data from the host computer and writes the  
specified log sector in the SN register.  
SN:  
SC:  
Log sector  
09h:  
01h:  
SMART selective self-test log  
80h-9Fh: 01h-10h Host vendor log  
* The host can write any desired data in the host vendor log.  
SMART ENABLE OPERATIONS:  
X’D8’  
X’D9’  
This subcommand enables the failure prediction feature. The setting is  
maintained even when the device is turned off and then on.  
When the device receives this subcommand, it asserts the BSY bit, enables  
the failure prediction feature, and then clears the BSY bit.  
SMART DISABLE OPERATIONS:  
This subcommand disables the failure prediction feature. The setting is  
maintained even when the device is turned off and then on.  
When the device receives this subcommand, it asserts the BSY bit, disables  
the failure prediction feature, and then clears the BSY bit.  
C141-E218  
5-43  
Interface  
Table 5.7 Features register values (subcommands) and functions (3 of 3)  
Features Resister  
X’DA’  
Function  
SMART RETURN STATUS:  
When the device receives this subcommand, it asserts the BSY bit and saves the  
current device attribute values. Then the device compares the device attribute  
values with insurance failure threshold values. If there is an attribute value  
exceeding the threshold, F4h and 2Ch are loaded into the CL and CH registers.  
If there are no attribute values exceeding the thresholds, 4Fh and C2h are loaded  
into the CL and CH registers. After the settings for the CL and CH registers  
have been determined, the device clears the BSY bit  
X’DB’  
SMART ENABLE/DISABLE AUTO OFF-LINE:  
This sets automatic off-line data collection in the enabled (when the SC  
register specification 00h) or disabled (when the SC register specification  
= 00) state. This setting is preserved whether the drive’s power is switched  
on or off.  
If 24 hours have passed since the power was switched on, or since the last  
time that off-line data were collected, off-line data collection is performed  
without relation to any command from the host computer.  
The host must regularly issue the SMART READ DATA subcommand (FR  
register = D0h), SMART SAVE ATTRIBUTE VALUES subcommand (FR  
register = D3h), or SMART RETURN STATUS subcommand (FR register =  
DAh) to save the device attribute value data on a medium.  
Alternatively, the device must issue the SMART ENABLE-DISABLE  
ATTRIBUTE AUTOSAVE subcommand (FR register = D2h) to use a feature  
which regularly saves the device attribute value data to a medium.  
The host can predict failures in the device by periodically issuing the SMART  
RETURN STATUS subcommand (FR register = DAh) to reference the CL and CH  
registers.  
If an attribute value is below the insurance failure threshold value, the device is  
about to fail or the device is nearing the end of its life. In this case, the host  
recommends that the user quickly back up the data.  
5-44  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
At command issuance (I-O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
0
DV xx  
Key (C2h)  
Key (4Fh)  
xx  
xx  
Subcommand  
At command completion (I-O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(ST) Status information  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
x
x
x
DV xx  
Key-failure prediction status (C2h/2Ch)  
Key-failure prediction status (4Fh/F4h)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
The attribute value information is 512-byte data; the format of this data is shown  
the following Table 5.8. The host can access this data using the SMART READ  
DATE subcommand (FR register = D0h). The insurance failure threshold value  
data is 512-byte data; the format of this data is shown the following Table 5.9.  
The host can access this data using the SMART READ ATTRIBUTE  
THRESHOLDS subcommand (FR register = D1h).  
C141-E218  
5-45  
Interface  
Table 5.8 Format of device attribute value data  
Byte  
Item  
00  
01  
Data format version number  
02  
Attribute 1  
Attribute ID  
Status flag  
03  
04  
05  
06  
Current attribute value  
Attribute value for worst case so far  
Raw attribute value  
07 to 0C  
0D  
Reserved  
0E to 169 Attribute 2 to  
attribute 30  
(The format of each attribute value is the same as  
that of bytes 02 to 0D.)  
16A  
16B  
Off-line data collection status  
Self-test execution status  
16C, 16D Off-line data collection execution time [sec.]  
16E  
16F  
Reserved  
Off-line data collection capability  
Trouble prediction capability flag  
Error logging capability  
170, 171  
172  
173  
(Self-test error detection point)  
174  
Simple self-test (Quick Test) execution time [min.]  
Comprehensive self-test (Comprehensive Test) execution time [min.]  
Conveyance self-test execution time [min.]  
175  
176  
177 to 181 Reserved  
182 to 1FE Vendor unique  
1FF  
Check sum  
Table 5.9 Format of insurance failure threshold value data  
Byte  
Item  
00  
01  
Data format version number  
Threshold 1 Attribute ID  
02  
03  
Insurance failure threshold  
Reserved  
04 to 0D  
0E to 169 Threshold 2 to (The format of each threshold value is the same as  
Threshold 30 that of bytes 02 to 0D.)  
16A to 17B Reserved  
17C to 1FE Vendor unique  
1FF Check sum  
5-46  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Data format version number  
The data format version number indicates the version number of the data format  
of the device attribute values or insurance failure thresholds. The data format  
version numbers of the device attribute values and insurance failure thresholds are  
the same. When a data format is changed, the data format version numbers are  
updated.  
Attribute ID  
The attribute ID is defined as follows:  
Attribute ID  
Attribute name  
(Indicates unused attribute data.)  
0
1
Read Error Rate  
2
Throughput Performance  
Spin Up Time  
3
4
Start/Stop Count  
5
Reallocated Sector Count  
Seek Error Rate  
7
8
Seek Time Performance  
Power-On Hours Count  
Spin Retry Count  
9
10  
12  
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
203  
Drive Power Cycle Count  
Emergency Retract Cycle Count  
Load/Unload Cycle Count  
HDA Temperature  
ECC On the Flag Count  
Reallocated Event Count  
Current Pending Sector Count  
Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count  
Ultra ATA CRC Error Count  
Write Error Rate  
Run Out  
C141-E218  
5-47  
Interface  
Status Flag  
Bit  
Meaning  
0
If this bit is 1, it indicates normal operations are assured with the  
attribute when the attribute value exceeds the threshold value.  
1
If this bit is 1 (0), it indicates the attribute only updated by an on-  
line test (off-line test).  
2
3
4
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that represents performance.  
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that represents an error rate.  
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that represents the number of  
occurrences.  
5
If this bit 1, it indicates the attribute that can be collected/saved  
even if the drive fault prediction function is disabled.  
6 to 15  
Reserve bit  
Current attribute value  
It indicates the normalized value of the original attribute value. The value  
deviates in a range of 01h to 64h (range of 01h to C8h for the ultra ATA CRC  
error rate). It indicates that the closer the value is to 01h, the higher the  
possibility of a failure. The host compares the attribute value with the threshold  
value. If the attribute value is larger than the threshold value, the drive is  
determined to be normal.  
Attribute value for the worst case so far  
This is the worst attribute value among the attribute values collected to date. This  
value indicates the state nearest to a failure so far.  
Raw attribute value  
Raw attributes data is retained.  
Off-line data collection status  
5-48  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Table 5.10 Off-line data collection status  
Status Byte  
Meaning  
00h or 80h Off-line data acquisition is not executed.  
02h or 82h Off-line data acquisition has ended without an error.  
04h or 84h Off-line data acquisition is interrupted by a command from the host.  
05h or 85h Off-line data acquisition has ended before completion because of a  
command from the host.  
06h or 86h Off-line data acquisition has ended before completion because of an  
error that makes acquisition impossible. (Not used)  
40 to 7Fh Vendor unique (Not used)  
C0h to FFh  
01h or 81h  
03h or 83h  
Reserved  
07h or 3Fh  
87h to BFh  
Self-test execution status  
Table 5.11 Self-test execution status  
Bit  
0 to 3:  
Meaning  
Remainder of the self-test is indicated as a percentage in a range  
of "0h to 9h" (corresponding to 0 to 90 %).  
4 to 7:  
= 0h:  
Self-test execution status  
Self-test has ended successfully, or self-test has not been  
executed.  
= 1h:  
= 2h:  
Self-test is suspended by the host.  
Self-test is interrupted by a soft/hard reset from the host.  
= 3h:  
= 4h:  
Self-test cannot be executed.  
Self-test has ended with an abnormality because of unknown  
contents.  
= 5h:  
= 6h:  
= 7h:  
Self-test has ended with "Write/Read Test" error.  
Self-test has ended with "Servo Check," error.  
Self-test has ended with "SMART Drive Error Log Check,"  
"Random Read Test," "Adjacent G-List Test," or "Read Scan  
Test" error.  
= 8h:  
Self-test has ended with "Pre-SMART Check," or "Post-SMART  
Check" error.  
= 9h:  
= Ah:  
= Bh:  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
= Ch to Eh: Reserved  
= Fh: Self-test is in progress.  
C141-E218  
5-49  
Interface  
Off-line data collection capability  
Indicates the method of off-line data collection carried out by the drive. If the off-  
line data collection capability is 0, it indicates that off-line data collection is not  
supported.  
Table 5.12 Off-line data collection capability  
Bit  
0
Meaning  
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART EXECUTE OFF-  
LINE IMMEDATE sub-command (FR register = D4h) is  
supported.  
1
2
Vendor unique  
If this bit is 1, it indicates that acquisition of off-line data  
under execution is aborted when a new command is received.  
3
4
5
6
7
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Off-line Read  
Scanning Technology is supported.  
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Self-test function  
is supported.  
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Conveyance Self-  
test is supported.  
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the SMART Selective Self-  
test is supported.  
Reserved bits  
Failure prediction capability flag  
Table 5.13 Failure prediction capability flag  
Bit  
0
Meaning  
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the attribute value is saved on  
media before the drive enters the power save mode.  
1
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the attribute value is saved  
automatically after the pre-set operation of the drive.  
2 to 15  
Reserved bits  
5-50  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Error logging capability  
Table 5.14 Error logging capability  
Meaning  
Bit  
0
If this bit is 1, it indicates that the drive error logging  
function is supported.  
1 to 7  
Reserved bits  
Check sum  
Two’s complement of the lower byte, obtained by adding 511-byte data one byte  
at a time from the beginning.  
Insurance failure threshold  
The limit of a varying attribute value. The host compares the attribute values with  
the thresholds to identify a failure.  
Table 5.15 Log directory data format  
Byte  
Item  
00  
01  
SMART Logging Version  
02  
Number of sectors of Address "01h"  
03  
04  
05-0B  
Reserved  
Number of sectors of Address "02h"  
Reserved  
0C  
0D-11  
12  
Number of sectors of Address "06h"  
Reserved  
Number of sectors of Address "09h"  
Reserved  
13-FF  
100  
Number of sector  
Address 80h  
101  
Reserved  
102  
Address 81h  
Address 9Fh  
"102" and "13F" are both the same  
format as "100-101"  
13F  
140  
Reserved  
1FF  
C141-E218  
5-51  
Interface  
SMART error logging  
If the device detects an unrecoverable error during execution of a command  
received from the host, the device registers the error information in the SMART  
Summary Error Log (see Table 5.16) and the SMART Comprehensive Error Log  
(see Table 5.17), and saves the information on media.  
The host issues the SMART Read Log Sector sub-command (FR register = D5h,  
SN register = 01h, SC register = 01h) and can read the SMART Summary Error  
Log.  
The host issues the SMART Read Log Sector sub-command (FR register = D5h,  
SN register = 02h, SC register = 33h) and can read the SMART Comprehensive  
Error Log.  
5-52  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Table 5.16 Data format of SMART Summary Error Log  
Item  
Byte  
00  
Version of this function  
01  
Pointer for the latest "Error Log Data Structure"  
First command data structure  
02 to 0D  
0E to 19  
1A to 25  
26 to 31  
32  
Second command data structure  
Third command data structure  
Fourth command data structure  
Error log data Fifth Command  
Device Control register value  
structure  
data structure  
33  
Features register value  
34  
Sector Count register value  
Sector Number register value  
Cylinder Low register value  
Cylinder High register value  
Drive/Head register value  
Command register value  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A to 3D  
Elapsed time after the power-on  
sequence (unit: ms)  
3E  
3F  
Error data  
structure  
Reserved  
Error register value  
Sector Count register value  
Sector Number register value  
Cylinder Low register value  
Cylinder High register value  
Drive/Head register value  
Status register value  
Vendor unique  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46 to 58  
59  
State  
5A, 5B  
Power-on time (unit: h)  
5C to 1C3 Error log data Format of each error log data structure is same as those of  
structure 2 to  
Error log data  
structure 5  
bytes 02 to 5B.  
1C4, 1C5 Number of unrecoverable errors that have occurred.  
1C6 to 1FE Reserved  
1FF  
Check sum  
C141-E218  
5-53  
Interface  
Command data structure  
Indicates the command received when an error occurs.  
Error data structure  
Indicates the status register when an error occurs.  
Total number of drive errors  
Indicates total number of errors registered in the error log.  
Check sum  
Two's complementary for the lowest-order 1 byte that is obtained by adding 1 byte  
after another for as many as 511 bytes beginning from the top of the structure.  
Status  
Bits 0 to 3: Indicates the drive status when received error commands according  
to the following table.  
Bits 4 to 7: Vendor unique  
Status  
Meaning  
0
Unclear status  
Sleep status  
1
2
3
Standby status  
Active status (BSY bit = 0)  
Off-line data collection being executed  
Reserved  
4
5 to F  
Table 5.17 Data format of SMART Comprehensive Error Log  
Byte  
First sector  
SMART Error Logging 01h  
Index Pointer Latest Error Data Structure.  
1st Error Log Data Structure  
2nd Error Log Data Structure  
3rd Error Log Data Structure  
4th Error Log Data Structure  
5th Error Log Data Structure  
Total Error Count  
Next sector  
Reserved  
00h  
01h  
Reserved  
02h...5Bh  
Data Structure 5n + 1  
Data Structure 5n + 2  
Data Structure 5n + 3  
Data Structure 5n + 4  
Data Structure 5n + 5  
Reserved  
5Ch...B5h  
B6h...10Fh  
110h...169h  
16Ah...1C3h  
1C4h...1C5h  
1C6h...1FEh  
1FFh  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Checksum  
Checksum  
5-54  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
SMART self-test  
The host computer can issue the SMART Execute Off-line Immediate sub-  
command (FR Register = D4h) and cause the device to execute a self-test. When  
the self-test is completed, the device saves the SMART self-test log to the disk  
medium.  
The host computer can issue the SMART Read Log Sector sub-command (FR  
Register = D5h, SN Register = 06h, SC register = 01h) and can read the SMART  
self-test log.  
Table 5.18 SMART self-test log data format  
Byte  
Item  
00, 01  
02  
Self-test log data structure  
Self-test log 1 Self-test number (SN Register Value)  
03  
Self-test execution status  
Life time. Total power-on time [hours]  
Self-test error No.  
04, 05  
06  
07 to 0A  
0B to 19  
Error LBA  
Vendor unique  
1A to 1F9 Self-test log 2 to 21  
(Each log data format is the same as that in  
byte 02 to 19.)  
1FA, 1FB Vendor unique  
1FC  
Self-test index  
1FD, 1FE Reserved  
1FF  
Check sum  
Self-test number  
Indicates the type of self-test executed.  
Self-test execution status  
Same as byte 16Bh of the attribute value.  
Self-test index  
If this is "00h", it indicates the status where the self-test has never been executed.  
Check sum  
Two's complementary for the lowest-order 1 byte that is obtained by adding 1  
byte after another for as many as 511 bytes from the top.  
C141-E218  
5-55  
Interface  
Table 5.19 Selective self-test log data structure  
Offset  
Description  
Initial  
00h, 01h  
01h, 00h  
Data Structure Revision Number  
02h...09h  
0Ah...11h  
12h...19h  
1Ah...21h  
22h...29h  
2Ah...31h  
32h...39h  
3Ah...41h  
42h...49h  
4Ah...51h  
52h...151h  
152h...1EBh  
1Ech...1F3h  
1F4h...1F5h  
1F6h...1F7h  
1F8h  
Starting LBA  
Test Span 1  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h...00h  
00h  
Ending LBA  
Starting LBA  
Test Span 2  
Ending LBA  
Starting LBA  
Test Span 3  
Ending LBA  
Starting LBA  
Test Span 4  
Ending LBA  
Starting LBA  
Test Span 5  
Ending LBA  
Reserved  
Vender Unique  
Current LBA under test  
Current Span under test  
Feature Flags  
Offline Execution Flag  
Vender Unique  
1F9h  
Selective Offline Scan Number  
Reserved  
00h  
1FAh, 1FBh  
1FCh, 1FDh  
1FEh, 1FFh  
00h, 00h  
00h, 00h  
00h, FFh  
Selective Self-test pending time [min]  
Check sum  
Test span  
Selective self-test log provides for the definition of up to five test spans. If the  
starting and ending LBA values for a test span are both zero, a test span is not  
defined and not tested.  
Current LBA under test  
As the self-test progress, the device shall modify this value to contain the LBA  
currently being tested.  
Current span under test  
As the self-test progress, the device shall modify this value to contain the test span  
number currently being tested.  
5-56  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Feature flags  
Table 5.20 Selective self-test feature flags  
Description  
Bit  
0
Vendor specific (unused)  
1
When set to one, perform off-line scan after selective test  
Vendor specific (unused)  
2
3
When set to one, off-line scan after selective test is pending.  
When set to one, off-line scan after selective test is active.  
Reserved  
4
5...15  
Bit [l] shall be written by the host and returned unmodified by the device. Bit  
[3:4] shall be written as zeros by the host and the device shall modify them as the  
test progress.  
Selective self-test pending time [min]  
The selective self-test pending time is the time in minutes from power-on to the  
resumption of the off-line testing if the pending bit is set.  
C141-E218  
5-57  
Interface  
(17) DEVICE CONFIGURATION (X'B1')  
Individual Device Configuration Overlay feature set commands are identified by  
the value placed in the Features register. The following table shows these  
Features register values. If this command sets with the reserved value of Features  
register, an aborted error is posted.  
FR values  
Command  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET  
Reserved  
C0h  
C1h  
C2h  
C3h  
00h-BFh, C4h-FFh  
At command issuance (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(FR)  
1
x
0
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
C0h/C1h/C2h/C3h  
At command completion (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(ST) Status information  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(ER)  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-58  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE (FR = C0h)  
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE command disables any setting  
previously made by a DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command and returns  
the content of the IDENTIFY DEVICE command response to the original settings  
as indicated by the data returned from the execution of a DEVICE  
CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command. After execution of this command, the  
settings are kept for the device power down or reset.  
If a Host Protected Area has been set by a SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT)  
command, or if DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK is set, an aborted  
error is posted.  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK (FR = C1h)  
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK command prevents accidental  
modification of the Device Configuration Overlay settings. After successful  
execution of a DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK command, all  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET, DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE  
LOCK, DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY, and DEVICE  
CONFIGURATION RESTORE commands are aborted by the device. The  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK condition is cleared by a power-  
down, not cleared by a hardware or software reset.  
If the device has executed a previous DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE  
LOCK command since power-up, an aborted error is posted.  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY (FR = C2h)  
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command returns a 512-byte data  
structure is shown in Table 5.21. The content of this data structure indicates the  
selectable commands, modes, and feature sets that the device is capable of  
supporting. If a DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command has been issued  
reducing the capabilities, the response to an IDENTIFY DEVICE command will  
reflect the reduced set of capabilities, while the DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
IDENTIFY command will reflect the entire set of selectable capabilities.  
If the device has executed a previous DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE  
LOCK command since power-up, an aborted error is posted.  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET (FR = C3h)  
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command allows reducing the set of  
optional commands, modes, or feature sets supported by a device as indicated by a  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command. The format of the overlay  
transmitted by the device is described in Table 5.21. As a result to the limitation  
of the function by the DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command, is reflected  
in IDENTIFY information. When the bits in these words are cleared, the device  
no longer supports the indicated command, mode, or feature set. If a bit is set in  
the overlay transmitted by the device that is not set in the overlay received from a  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY command, no action is taken for that  
C141-E218  
5-59  
Interface  
bit. After execution of this command, the settings are kept for the device power  
down or reset.  
If the restriction of Multiword DMA modes or Ultra DMA modes is executed, a  
SET FEATURES command should be issued for the modes restriction prior the  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command is issued.  
When the Automatic Acoustic Management function is assumed to be  
unsupported, Automatic Acoustic Management is prohibited beforehand by SET  
FEATURES command (FR=C2h).  
If a DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET command has already modified the  
original settings as reported by a DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY  
command, if DEVICE CONFIGURATION FREEZE LOCK is set, if any of the  
bit modification restrictions described are violated, or if a Host Protected Area has  
been established by the execution of a SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT) command, an  
aborted error is posted.  
5-60  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Table 5.21 DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY data structure  
Word  
Value  
Content  
0
1
X'0001'  
X'0007'  
Data structure revision  
Multiword DMA modes supported  
Reflected in IDENTIFY information "WORD63".  
Bit 15-3: Reserved  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1:  
Bit 0:  
1 = Multiword DMA mode 2 and below are supported  
1 = Multiword DMA mode 1 and below are supported  
1 = Multiword DMA mode 0 is supported  
2
X'003F'  
Ultra DMA modes supported  
Reflected in IDENTIFY information "WORD88".  
Bit 15-6: Reserved  
Bit 5:  
Bit 4:  
Bit 3:  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1:  
Bit 0:  
1 = Ultra DMA mode 5 and below are supported  
1 = Ultra DMA mode 4 and below are supported  
1 = Ultra DMA mode 3 and below are supported  
1 = Ultra DMA mode 2 and below are supported  
1 = Ultra DMA mode 1 and below are supported  
1 = Ultra DMA mode 0 is supported  
3-6  
7
-
Maximum LBA address Reflected in IDENTIFY information  
"WORD60-61". (WORD100-103) *  
X'30CF'  
Command set/feature set supported  
(X'39CF') * Reflected in IDENTIFY information "WORD82-87".  
Bit 15-14: Reserved  
Bit 13: 1 = SMART Conveyance self-test supported  
Bit 12: 1 = SMART Selective self-test supported  
Bit 11: * 1 = FUA (Forced Unit Access) supported  
Bit 10: Reserved  
Bit 9: 1 = Streaming feature set supported  
Bit 8: * 1 = 48-bit Addressing feature set supported  
Bit 7:  
Bit 6:  
Bit 5:  
Bit 4:  
Bit 3:  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1:  
Bit 0:  
1 = Host Protected Area feature set supported  
1 = Automatic acoustic management supported  
1 = READ/WRITE DMA QUEUED commands supported  
1 = Power-up in Standby feature set supported  
1 = Security feature set supported  
1 = SMART error log supported  
1 = SMART self-test supported  
1 = SMART feature set supported  
C141-E218  
5-61  
Interface  
Word  
Value  
Content  
8-254  
255  
X'0000'  
X'xxA5'  
Reserved  
Integrity word. Bits 15:8 contains the data structure checksum that is  
the two's complement of the sum of all byte in words 0 through 254  
and the byte consisting of bits 7:0 of word 255.  
*: When "48 bit LBA" of the option (customize) is supported, same number of  
LBA as WORD60-61 is displayed.  
5-62  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(18) READ MULTIPLE (X’C4’)  
The READ MULTIPLE Command performs the same as the READ SECTOR(S)  
Command except that when the device is ready to transfer data for a block of  
sectors, and enters the interrupt pending state only before the data transfer for the  
first sector of the block sectors. In the READ MULTIPLE command operation,  
the DRQ bit of the Status register is set only at the start of the data block, and is  
not set on each sector.  
The number of sectors per block is defined by a successful SET MULTIPLE  
MODE Command. The SET MULTIPLE MODE command should be executed  
prior to the READ MULTIPLE command.  
If the number of requested sectors is not divided evenly (having the same number  
of sectors [block count]), as many full blocks as possible are transferred, then a  
final partial block is transferred. The number of sectors in the partial block to be  
transferred is n where n = remainder of (“number of sectors”/”block count”).  
If the READ MULTIPLE command is issued before the SET MULTIPLE MODE  
command is executed or when the READ MULTIPLE command is disabled, the  
device rejects the READ MULTIPLE command with an ABORTED COMMAND  
error.  
Figure 5.2 shows an example of the execution of the READ MULTIPLE  
command.  
Block count specified by SET MULTIPLE MODE command = 4 (number of  
sectors in a block)  
READ MULTIPLE command specifies;  
Number of requested sectors = 9 (Sector Count register = 9)  
Figure 5.2 Execution example of READ MULTIPLE command  
C141-E218  
5-63  
Interface  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1
x
1
0
x
0
0
1
0
0
L
DV StartheadNo. /LBA  
[MSB]  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Start sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
Transfer sector count  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST) Status information  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
x
L
x
DV End head No. / LBA [MSB]  
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
End sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
00(*1)  
Error information  
*1  
If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining number of  
sectors for which data was not transferred is set in this register.  
5-64  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(19) WRITE MULTIPLE (X’C5’)  
This command is similar to the WRITE SECTOR(S) command. The device does  
not generate interrupts (assertion of the INTRQ) signal) on each sector but on the  
transfer of a block which contains the number of sectors for which the number is  
defined by the SET MULTIPLE MODE command. The DRQ bit of the Status  
register is required to set only at the start of the data block, not on each sector.  
The number of sectors per block is defined by a successful SET MULTIPLE  
MODE command. The SET MULTIPLE MODE command should be executed  
prior to the WRITE MULTIPLE command.  
If the number of requested sectors is not divided evenly (having the same number  
of sectors [block count]), as many full blocks as possible are transferred, then a  
final partial block is transferred. The number of sectors in the partial block to be  
transferred is n where n = remainder of (“number of sectors”/”block count”).  
If the WRITE MULTIPLE command is issued before the SET MULTIPLE  
MODE command is executed or when WRITE MULTIPLE command is disabled,  
the device rejects the WRITE MULTIPLE command with an ABORTED  
COMMAND error.  
Disk errors encountered during execution of the WRITE MULTIPLE command are  
posted after attempting to write the block or the partial block that was transferred.  
Write operation ends at the sector where the error was encountered even if the sector is  
in the middle of a block. If an error occurs, the subsequent block shall not be  
transferred. Interrupts are generated when the DRQ bit of the Status register is set at  
the beginning of each block or partial block.  
The contents of the command block registers related to addresses after the transfer  
of a data block containing an erred sector are undefined. To obtain a valid error  
information, the host should retry data transfer as an individual request.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1
x
1
0
x
0
0
1
0
1
L
DV StartheadNo. /LBA  
[MSB]  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Start sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
Transfer sector count  
xx  
C141-E218  
5-65  
Interface  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST) Status information  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
x
L
x
DV End head No. / LBA [MSB]  
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
End sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
00  
Error information  
5-66  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(20) SET MULTIPLE MODE (X’C6’)  
This command enables the device to perform the READ MULTIPLE and  
WRITE MULTIPLE commands. The block count (number of sectors in a  
block) for these commands is also specified by the SET MULTIPLE MODE  
command.  
The number of sectors per block is written into the Sector Count register. The  
IDD supports 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32 (sectors) as the block counts.  
Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the BSY bit of the Status register  
and checks the contents of the Sector Count register. If the contents of the Sector  
Count register are valid and are supported block count, the value is stored for all  
subsequent READ MULTIPLE and WRITE MULTIPLE commands. Execution  
of these commands is then enabled. If the value of the Sector Count register is not  
a supported block count, an ABORTED COMMAND error is posted and the  
READ MULTIPLE and WRITE MULTIPLE commands are disabled.  
If the contents of the Sector Count register is 0, when the SET MULTIPLE  
MODE command is issued, the READ MULTIPLE and WRITE MULTIPLE  
commands are disabled.  
When the SET MULTIPLE MODE command operation is completed, the device  
clears the BSY bit and generates an interrupt.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
x
0
x
0
0
1
1
0
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
Sector count/block  
xx  
After power-on the READ MULTIPLE and WRITE MULTIPLE command  
operation are disabled as the default mode.  
C141-E218  
5-67  
Interface  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Sector count/block  
Error information  
5-68  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(21) READ DMA (X’C8’ or X’C9’)  
This command operates similarly to the READ SECTOR(S) command except for  
following events.  
The data transfer starts at the timing of DMARQ signal assertion.  
The device controls the assertion or negation timing of the DMARQ signal.  
The device posts a status as the result of command execution only once at  
completion of the data transfer.  
When an error, such as an unrecoverable medium error, that the command  
execution cannot be continued is detected, the data transfer is stopped without  
transferring data of sectors after the erred sector. The device generates an  
interrupt using the INTRQ signal and posts a status to the host system. The  
format of the error information is the same as the READ SECTOR(S) command.  
In LBA mode  
The logical block address is specified using the start head No., start cylinder No.,  
and first sector No. fields. At command completion, the logical block address of  
the last sector and remaining number of sectors of which data was not transferred,  
like in the CHS mode, are set.  
The host system can select the DMA transfer mode by using the SET FEATURES  
command.  
Multiword DMA transfer mode 0 to 2  
Ultra DMA transfer mode 0 to 5  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1
x
1
0
x
0
1
0
0
R
1F6H(DH)  
L
DV StartheadNo. /LBA  
[MSB]  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Start sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
Transfer sector count  
xx  
C141-E218  
5-69  
Interface  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST) Status information  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
x
L
x
DV End head No. / LBA [MSB]  
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
End sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
00 (*1)  
Error information  
*1  
If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining number of  
sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this register.  
5-70  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(22) WRITE DMA (X’CA’ or X’CB’)  
This command operates similarly to the WRITE SECTOR(S) command except for  
following events.  
The data transfer starts at the timing of DMARQ signal assertion.  
The device controls the assertion or negation timing of the DMARQ signal.  
The device posts a status as the result of command execution only once at  
completion of the data transfer or completion of processing in the device.  
The device posts a status as the result of command execution only once at  
completion of the data transfer.  
When an error, such as an unrecoverable medium error, that the command  
execution cannot be continued is detected, the data transfer is stopped without  
transferring data of sectors after the erred sector. The device generates an  
interrupt using the INTRQ signal and posts a status to the host system. The  
format of the error information is the same as the WRITE SECTOR(S) command.  
A host system can select the following transfer mode using the SET FEATURES  
command.  
Multiword DMA transfer mode 0 to 2  
Ultra DMA transfer mode 0 to 5  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1
x
1
0
x
0
1
0
1
R
1F6H(DH)  
L
DV StartheadNo. /LBA  
[MSB]  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
Start cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
Start cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
Start sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
Transfer sector count  
xx  
C141-E218  
5-71  
Interface  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST) Status information  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
x
L
x
DV End head No. / LBA [MSB]  
End cylinder No. [MSB] / LBA  
End cylinder No. [LSB] / LBA  
End sector No. / LBA [LSB]  
00 (*1)  
Error information  
*1  
If the command is terminated due to an error, the remaining number of  
sectors of which data was not transferred is set in this register.  
5-72  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(23) READ BUFFER (X’E4’)  
The host system can read the current contents of the data buffer of the device by  
issuing this command. Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the BSY bit  
of Status register and sets up for a read operation. Then the device sets the DRQ  
bit of Status register, clears the BSY bit, and generates an interrupt. After that,  
the host system can read up to 512 bytes of data from the buffer.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
x
x
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-73  
Interface  
(24) FLUSH CACHE (X’E7’)  
This command is used to order to write every write cache data stored by the  
device into the medium. BSY bit is held at "1" until every data has been written  
normally or an error has occurred. The device performs every error recovery so  
that the data are read correctly.  
When executing this command, the reading of the data may take several seconds  
if much data are to be read.  
In case a non-recoverable error has occurred while the data is being read, the error  
generation address is put into the command block register before ending the  
command. This error sector is deleted from the write cache data, and the  
remaining cache data is written into the medium by the execution of the next  
Flush Cache command.  
At command issuance (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
0
1
1
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I-O register contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST) Status information  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(ER)  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-74  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(25) WRITE BUFFER (X’E8’)  
The host system can overwrite the contents of the data buffer of the device with a  
desired data pattern by issuing this command. Upon receipt of this command, the  
device sets the BSY bit of the Status register. Then the device sets the DRQ bit of  
Status register and clears the BSY bit when the device is ready to receive the data.  
After that, 512 bytes of data is transferred from the host and the device writes the  
data to the buffer, then generates an interrupt.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
0
0
0
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-75  
Interface  
(26) IDENTIFY DEVICE (X’EC’)  
The host system issues the IDENTIFY DEVICE command to read parameter  
information from the device. Upon receipt of this command, the drive sets the  
BSY bit to one, prepares to transfer the 256 words of device identification data to  
the host, sets the DRQ bit to one, clears the BSY bit to zero, and generates an  
interrupt. After that, the host system reads the information out of the sector  
buffer. Table 5.22 shows the values of the parameter words and the meaning in  
the buffer.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
1
0
0
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-76  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(27) IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA (X’EE’)  
When this command is not used to transfer data to the host in DMA mode, this  
command functions in the same way as the Identify Device command.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
1
1
0
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-77  
Interface  
Table 5.22 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command (1 of 2)  
Word  
Value  
Description  
0
1
X’045A’  
X’3FFF’  
X’xxxx’  
X’10’  
General Configuration *1  
Number of Logical cylinders *2  
Detailed Configuration *3  
Number of Logical Heads *2  
Undefined  
2
3
4-5  
6
X’0000’  
X’3F’  
Number of Logical sectors per Logical track *2  
Undefined  
7-9  
10-19  
20  
21  
X’0000’  
Set by a device Serial number (ASCII code, 20 characters, right)  
X’0003’  
X’xxxx’  
Undefined  
Buffer Size (1 LSB: 512 Bytes) ex. Buffer Size=2MBytes: X’1000’  
Buffer Size=8MBytes: X’4000’  
22  
X’0000’  
Reserved  
23-26  
27-46  
47  
Firmware revision (ASCII code, 8 characters, left)  
Set by a device Model name (ASCII code, 40 characters, left)  
X’8010’  
Maximum number of sectors per interrupt on READ/WRITE  
MULTIPLE command  
48  
49  
X’0000’  
X’2B00’  
X’400x’  
X’0200’  
X’0200’  
X’0007’  
(Variable)  
(Variable)  
(Variable)  
(Variable)  
*8  
Reserved  
Capabilities *4  
50  
Capabilities *5  
51  
PIO data transfer mode *6  
Reserved  
52  
53  
Enable/disable setting of words 54-58 and 64-70, 88 *7  
Number of current Cylinders  
Number of current Head  
Number of current sectors per track  
Total number of current sectors  
54  
55  
56  
57-58  
59  
Transfer sector count currently set by READ/WRITE MULTIPLE  
command *8  
60-61  
62  
*2  
Total number of user addressable sectors (LBA mode only) *2  
Reserved  
X’0000’  
X’xx07’  
X’0003’  
63  
Multiword DMA transfer mode *9  
64  
Advance PIO transfer mode support status *10  
5-78  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Table 5.22 Information to be read by IDENTIFY DEVICE command (2 of 2)  
Word  
Value  
Description  
65  
66  
67  
X’0078’  
X’0078’  
X’00F0’  
Minimum multiword DMA transfer cycle time per word: 120 [ns]  
Manufacturer’s recommended DMA transfer cycle time: 120 [ns]  
Minimum PIO transfer cycle time without IORDY flow control:  
240 [ns]  
68  
X’0078’  
Minimum PIO transfer cycle time with IORDY flow control:  
120 [ns]  
69-79  
80  
X’0000’  
X’007C’  
X’0019’  
X’346B’  
X’5B29’  
X’40xx’  
*15  
Reserved  
Major version number *11  
81  
Minor version number  
82  
Support of command sets *12  
Support of command sets *13  
Support of command sets/function *14  
Valid of command sets/function *15  
Valid of command sets/function *16  
Default of command sets/function *17  
Ultra DMA transfer mode *18  
83  
84  
85  
86  
*16  
87  
*17  
88  
X’xx3F’  
89  
Set by a device Security Erase Unit execution time (1 LSB: 2 min.) *19  
90  
X’0000’  
Enhanced Security Erase Unit execution time  
(1 LSB: 2 min.)  
91  
92  
(Variable)  
(Variable)  
*20  
Advance power management level  
Master password revision  
Hardware configuration *20  
Acoustic Management level *21  
Reserved  
93  
94  
(Variable)  
X’0000’  
X’xx’  
95-99  
100-103  
Total number of sectors accessible by users in the 48-bit LBA  
mode *22  
104-127  
128  
X’00’  
Reserved  
X’0xxx’  
X’xxxx’  
X’0000’  
X’xxA5’  
Security status *23  
Undefined  
129-159  
160-254  
255  
Reserved  
Check sum (The 2 complement of the lower order byte resulting from  
summing bits 7 to 0 of word 0 to 254 and word 255, in byte units.)  
*1 Word 0: General configuration  
Bit 15: ATA device = 0, ATAPI device = 1  
C141-E218  
5-79  
Interface  
Bit 14-8: Undefined  
Bit 7:  
Removable disk drive = 1  
Bit 6:  
Fixed drive = 1  
Bit 5-3:  
Bit 2:  
Undefined  
IDENTIFY DEVICE Valid = 0  
Reserved  
Bit 1-0:  
*2 Word 1, 3, 6, 60-61  
Word  
MHV2120AT MHV2100AT MHV2080AT MHV2060AT MHV2040AT  
1
3
X ' 3FFF '  
X ' 10 '  
X ' 3FFF '  
X ' 10 '  
X ' 3FFF '  
X ' 10 '  
X ' 3FFF '  
X ' 10 '  
X ' 3FFF '  
X ' 10 '  
6
X ' 3F '  
X ' 3F '  
X ' 3F '  
X ' 3F '  
X ' 3F '  
60-61  
X ' DF94BB0 ' X ' BA52230 ' X ' 950F8B0 '  
X' 6FC7C80'  
X ' 4A85300 '  
*3 Status of the Word 2 Identify information is shown as follows:  
37C8h  
738Ch  
8C73h  
C837h  
Others  
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the  
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information  
is incomplete.  
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the  
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information  
is incomplete.  
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the  
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information  
is incomplete.  
The device requires the SET FEATURES sub-command after the  
power-on sequence in order to spin-up. The Identify information  
is incomplete.  
Reserved  
*4 Word 49: Capabilities  
Bit 15-14: Reserved  
Bit 13:  
Bit 12:  
Bit 11:  
1= Support the standby timer the same as the ATA standard.  
Reserved  
1 = Supported  
Bit 10:  
Bit 7-0:  
Bit 8:  
0 = Disable inhibition  
Undefined  
1 = LBA Supported  
Bit 9:  
1 = DMA Supported  
5-80  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
*5 Word 50: Device capability  
Bit 15:  
Bit 14:  
0
1
Bit 13 to 1 Reserved  
Bit 0  
Standby timer value '1' = Standby timer value of the device is the  
smallest value.  
*6 Word 51: PIO data transfer mode  
Bit 15-8: PIO data transfer mode  
X’02’=PIO mode 2  
Bit 7-0:  
Undefined  
*7 Word 53: Enable/disable setting of word 54-58 and 64-70  
Bit 15-3: Reserved  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1:  
Bit 0:  
1 = Enable the word 88  
1 = Enable the word 64-70  
1 = Enable the word 54-58  
*8 Word 59: Transfer sector count currently set by READ/WRITE  
MULTIPLE command  
Bit 15-9: Reserved  
Bit 8:  
1 = Enable the multiple sector transfer  
Bit 7-0:  
Transfer sector count currently set by READ/WRITE MULTIPLE  
command without interrupt supports 2, 4, 8 and 16 sectors.  
*9 Word 63: Multiword DMA transfer mode  
Bit 15-11: Reserved  
Bit 10:  
Bit 9:  
Bit 8:  
Bit 7-3:  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1:  
Bit 0:  
'1' = multiword DMA mode 2 is selected.  
'1' = multiword DMA mode 1 is selected.  
'1' = multiword DMA mode 0 is selected.  
Reserved  
1 = Multiword DMA mode 2, 1, and 0 supported (Bit 1,0 = '1,1')  
1 = Multiword DMA mode 1, and 0 supported (Bit 0 = '1')  
1 = Mode 0  
C141-E218  
5-81  
Interface  
*10 Word 64: Advance PIO transfer mode support status  
Bit 15-8: Reserved  
Bit 7-0:  
Bit 1:  
Advance PIO transfer mode  
1 = Mode 4  
Bit 0:  
1 = Mode 3  
*11 WORD 80  
Bit 15-7: Reserved  
Bit 6:  
Bit 5:  
1 = ATA/ATAPI-6 supported  
1 = ATA/ATAPI-5 supported  
1 = ATA/ATAPI-4 supported  
1 = ATA-3 supported  
Bit 4:  
Bit 3:  
Bit 2:  
1 = ATA-2 supported  
Bit 1-0:  
*12 WORD 82  
Bit 15:  
Bit 14:  
Bit 13:  
Bit 12:  
Bit 11:  
Bit 10:  
Bit 9:  
Undefined  
Undefined  
'1' = Supports the NOP command.  
'1' = Supports the READ BUFFER command.  
'1' = Supports the WRITE BUFFER command.  
Undefined  
'1' = Supports the Host Protected Area feature set.  
'1' = Supports the DEVICE RESET command.  
'1' = Supports the SERVICE interrupt.  
'1' = Supports the release interrupt.  
Bit 8:  
Bit 7:  
Bit 6:  
'1' = Supports the read cache function.  
'1' = Supports the write cache function.  
'1' = Supports the PACKET command feature set.  
'1' = Supports the power management feature set.  
'1' = Supports the Removable Media feature set.  
'1' = Supports the Security Mode feature set.  
'1' = Supports the SMART feature set.  
Bit 5:  
Bit 4:  
Bit 3:  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1:  
Bit 0:  
5-82  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
*13 WORD 83  
Bit 15:  
Bit 14:  
Bit 13: *  
Bit 12:  
Bit 11:  
Bit 10:*  
Bit 9:  
= 0  
= 1  
'1' = FLUSH CACHE EXT command supported.  
'1' = FLUSH CACHE command supported.  
'1' = Device Configuration Overlay feature set supported.  
'1' = 48 bit LBA feature set.  
'1' = Automatic Acoustic Management feature set.  
'1' = Supports the SET MAX Security extending command.  
Reserved  
Bit 8:  
Bit 7:  
Bit 6:  
'1' = When the power is turned on, spin is started by the SET  
FEATURES sub-command.  
Bit 5:  
Bit 4:  
'1' = Supports the Power-Up In Standby set.  
'1' = Supports the Removable Media Status Notification feature  
set.  
Bit 3:  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1:  
Bit 0:  
'1' = Supports the Advanced Power Management feature set.  
'1' = Supports the CFA (Compact Flash Association) feature set.  
'1' = Supports the READ/WRITE DMA QUEUED command.  
'1' = Supports the DOWNLOAD MICROCODE command.  
*: Option (customizing)  
*14 WORD 84  
Bit 15:  
= 0  
Bit 14:  
= 1  
Bit 13:  
'1' = Supports the IDLE IMMDIATE with UNLOAD FEATURE  
Bit 12-11: Reserved  
Bit 10:  
'1' = URG bit supported for WRITE STREAM DMA EXT and  
WRITE STREAM EXT  
Bit 9:  
'1' = URG bit supported for READ STREAM DMA EXT and  
READ STREAM EXT  
Bit 8:  
Bit 7:  
'1' = Supports the 64-bit World Wide Name  
'1' =Supports the WRITE DMA QUEUED FUA EXT command  
C141-E218  
5-83  
Interface  
Bit 6: *  
'1' =Supports the WRITE DMA FUA EXT and WRITE  
MULTIPLE FUA EXT commands  
Bit 5: *  
Bit 4:  
'1' = Supports the General Purpose Logging feature set  
'1' = Supports the Streaming feature set  
Reserved  
Bit 3-2:  
Bit 1:  
'1' = Supports the SMART SELF-TEST.  
'1' = Supports the SMART Error Logging.  
Bit 0:  
*: Option (customizing)  
*15 WORD 85  
Bit 15:  
Undefined.  
Bit 14:  
Bit 13:  
Bit 12:  
Bit 11:  
Bit 10:  
Bit 9:  
'1' = Supports the NOP command.  
'1' = Supports the READ BUFFER command.  
'1' = Supports the WRITE BUFFER command.  
Undefined.  
'1' = Supports the Host Protected Area function.  
'1' = Supports the DEVICE RESET command.  
Bit 8:  
'1' = Enables the SERVICE interrupt. From the SET FEATURES  
command  
Bit 7:  
Bit 6:  
'1' = Enables the release interrupt. From the SET FEATURES  
command  
'1' = Enables the read cache function. From the SET FEATURES  
command  
Bit 5:  
Bit 4:  
Bit 3:  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1:  
Bit 0:  
'1' = Enables the write cache function.  
'1' = Enables the P PACKET command set.  
'1' = Supports the Power Management function.  
'1' = Supports the Removable Media function.  
'1' = From the SECURITY SET PASSWORD command  
'1' = From the SMART ENABLE OPERATION command  
5-84  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
*16 WORD 86  
Bits 15-14: Reserved  
Bit 13: * '1' = FLUSH CACHE EXT command supported.  
Bit 12:  
Bit 11:  
'1' = FLUSH CACHE command supported.  
'1' = Device Configuration Overlay feature set supported.  
Bit 10: * '1' = 48 bit LBA feature set.  
Bit 9:  
'1' = Enables the Automatic Acoustic Management function.  
From the SET FEATURES command  
'1' = From the SET MAX SET PASSWORD command  
Same definition as WORD 83.  
Bit 8:  
Bit 7:  
Bit6:  
'1' = The SET FEATURES subcommand isn’t necessary for  
Spin-up after power on.  
Bit 5:  
Bit 4:  
Bit 3:  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1: *  
Bit 0:  
'1' = Enables the Power-Up In Standby function.  
'1' = Enables the Removable Media Status Notification function.  
'1' = Enables the Advanced Power Management function.  
'1' = Supports the CFA (Compact Flash Association) feature set.  
'1' = Supports the READ/WRITE DMA QUEUED command.  
'1' = Supports the DOWNLOAD MICROCODE command.  
*: Option (customizing)  
*17 WORD 87  
Bit 15:  
= 0  
Bit 14:  
Bit 13:  
= 1  
'1' = Supports the IDLE IMMDIATE with UNLOAD FEATURE  
Bit 12-11: Reserved  
Bit 10:  
'1' = URG bit supported for WRITE STREAM DMA EXT and  
WRITE STREAM EXT  
Bit 9:  
'1' = URG bit supported for READ STREAM DMA EXT and  
READ STREAM EXT  
Bit 8:  
'1' = Supports the 64-bit World Wide Name  
Bit 7:  
'1' = Supports the WRITE DMA QUEUED FUA EXT command  
Bit 6: *  
'1' = Supports the WRITE DMA FUA EXT and WRITE  
MULTIPLE FUA EXT commands  
C141-E218  
5-85  
Interface  
Bit 5: *  
Bit 4:  
'1' = Supports the General Purpose Logging feature set  
'1' = Valid Configure Stream command has been executed  
Reserved  
Bit 3-2:  
Bit 1:  
'1' = Supports the SMART SELF-TEST.  
'1' = Supports the SMART Error Logging  
Bit 0:  
*18 WORD 88  
Bit 15-8: Currently used Ultra DMA transfer mode  
Bit 13: '1' = Mode 5 is selected.  
Bit 12: '1' = Mode 4 is selected.  
Bit 11: '1' = Mode 3 is selected.  
Bit 10: '1' = Mode 2 is selected.  
Bit 9: '1' = Mode 1 is selected.  
Bit 8: '1' = Mode 0 is selected.  
Bit 7-0:  
Supportable Ultra DMA transfer mode  
Bit 5: '1' = Supports the Mode 5  
Bit 4: '1' = Supports the Mode 4  
Bit 3: '1' = Supports the Mode 3  
Bit 2: '1' = Supports the Mode 2  
Bit 1: '1' = Supports the Mode 1  
Bit 0: '1' = Supports the Mode 0  
*19 WORD 89 (Value × 2 minutes)  
MHV2120AT = X'3C 120 minutes  
MHV2100AT = X'32 100 minutes  
MHV2080AT = X'28 80 minutes  
MHV2060AT = X'1E': 60 minutes  
MHV2040AT = X'14': 40 minutes  
*20 WORD 93  
Bits 15:  
Bit 14:  
Bit 13:  
= 0  
= '1'  
'1' = CBLID- is a higher level than VIH (80-conductor cable).  
'0' = CBLID- is a lower level than VIL (40-conductor cable).  
5-86  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Bits 12-8: In the case of Device 1 (slave drive), a valid value is set.  
Bit 12:  
Bit 11:  
Reserved  
'1' = Device asserts PDIAG-.  
Bit 10, 9: Method for deciding the device No. of Device 1.  
'00' = Reserved  
'01' = Using a jumper.  
'10' = Using the CSEL signal.  
'11' = Other method.  
Bit 8:  
= '1' (In the case of device 1)  
Bits 7-0: In the case of Device 0 (master drive), a valid value is set.  
Bit 7:  
Bit 6:  
Bit 5:  
Bit 4:  
Bit 3:  
Reserved  
'1' = Device 1 is selected, Device 0 responds.  
'1' = Device 0, assertion of DASP- was detected.  
'1' = Device 0, assertion of PDIAG- was detected.  
'1' = Device 0, an error was not detected in the self-  
diagnosis.  
Bit 2, 1: Method for deciding the device No. of Device 0.  
'00' = Reserved  
'01' = Using a jumper.  
'10' = Using the CSEL signal.  
'11' = Other method.  
Bit 0:  
'1'= (In the case of device 0)  
*21 WORD 94  
Bit 15-8: X'FE' Recommended acoustic management value.  
Bit 7-0:  
X'XX' Current set value.  
FE-C0: Performance mode  
BF-80: Acoustic mode  
00:  
Acoustic management is unused it.  
(It is same as "FE-CO")  
*22 WORD 100-103  
When "48 bit LBA" of the option (customize) is supported, same number of  
LBA as WORD 60-61 is displayed.  
C141-E218  
5-87  
Interface  
*23 WORD 128  
Bit 15-9: Reserved  
Bit 8:  
Bit 7-6:  
Bit 5:  
Bit 4:  
Bit 3:  
Bit 2:  
Bit 1:  
Bit 0:  
Security level. 0: High, 1: Maximum  
Reserved  
'1' = Enhanced security erase supported  
'1' = Security counter expired  
'1' = Security frozen  
'1' = Security locked  
'1' = Security enabled  
'1' = Security supported  
5-88  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(28) SET FEATURES (X’EF’)  
The host system issues the SET FEATURES command to set parameters in the  
Features register for the purpose of changing the device features to be executed.  
Upon receipt of this command, the device sets the BSY bit of the Status register  
and saves the parameters in the Features register. Then, the device clears the BSY  
bit, and generates an interrupt.  
If the value in the Features register is not supported or it is invalid, the device  
posts an ABORTED COMMAND error.  
Table 5.23 lists the available values and operational modes that may be set in the  
Features register.  
Table 5.23 Features register values and settable modes  
Features  
Register  
Drive operation mode  
X’02’  
X’03’  
X’05’  
X’42’  
X’55’  
X’66’  
X’82’  
X’85’  
X’AA’  
X’BB’  
Enables the write cache function.  
Set the data transfer mode. *1  
Enables the advanced power management function. *2  
Enables the Acoustic management function. *3  
Disables read cache function.  
Disables the reverting to power-on default settings after software reset. (*1)  
Disables the write cache function.  
Set the advanced power management mode to Mode-0.  
Enables the read cache function.  
Specifies the transfer of 4-byte ECC for READ LONG and WRITE LONG  
commands.  
(*1)  
X’C2’  
X’CC’  
Disables the Acoustic management function.  
Enables the reverting to power-on default settings after software reset. (*1)  
*1 Although there is a response to the command, nothing is done.  
At power-on or after hardware reset, the default mode is set as follows.  
Write cache function  
Transfer mode  
: Enabled  
: PIO Mode-4, Multiword DMA Mode-2  
Advanced power  
management function  
: Enabled (Mode-1)  
Acoustic  
management function  
: State keeping  
: Enabled  
Read cache function  
C141-E218  
5-89  
Interface  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
0
1
1
1
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx or *1~3  
[See Table 5.5]  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
*1) Data Transfer Mode  
The host sets X’03’ to the Features register. By issuing this command with  
setting a value to the Sector Count register, the transfer mode can be selected.  
Upper 5 bits of the Sector Count register defines the transfer type and lower 3 bits  
specifies the binary mode value.  
The IDD supports following values in the Sector Count register value. If other  
value than below is specified, an ABORTED COMMAND error is posted.  
PIO default transfer mode  
00000 000 (X’00’)  
PIO flow control transfer mode X  
00001 000 (X’08’: Mode 0)  
00001 001 (X’09’: Mode 1)  
00001 010 (X’0A’: Mode 2)  
00001 011 (X’0B’: Mode 3)  
00001 100 (X’0C’: Mode 4)  
5-90  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Multiword DMA transfer mode X  
Ultra DMA transfer mode X  
00100 000 (X’20’: Mode 0)  
00100 001 (X’21’: Mode 1)  
00100 010 (X’22’: Mode 2)  
01000 000 (X’40’: Mode 0)  
01000 001 (X’41’: Mode 1)  
01000 010 (X’42’: Mode 2)  
01000 011 (X’43’: Mode 3)  
01000 100 (X’44’: Mode 4)  
01000 101 (X’45’: Mode 5)  
*2) Advanced Power Management (APM)  
The host writes the Sector Count register with the desired power management  
level and executes this command with the Features register X’05’, and then  
Advanced Power Management is enabled.  
The drive automatically shifts to power saving mode up to the specified APM  
level when the drive does not receive any commands for a specific time. The  
sequence in which the power management level shifts is from Active Idle to Low  
Power Idle to Standby. The Mode-2 level requires the longest shifting time,  
depending on the APM level settings. The settings of the APM level revert to their  
default values (Mode-1) when power-on or a hardware reset occurs for the drive.  
APM Level  
Sector Count Register  
C0h-FEh  
80h-BFh  
01h-7Fh  
00h, FFh  
Mode 0 Active Idle Low Power Idle  
Mode 1 Active Idle Low Power Idle  
Mode 2 Active Idle Low Power Idle Standby  
Reserve (State Keep)  
Active Idle:  
The spindle motor rotates, and the head is loaded on  
the most inner position on media.  
Low Power Idle: The spindle motor rotates, and the head is unloaded.  
Standby: The spindle motor stops, and the head is unloaded.  
C141-E218  
5-91  
Interface  
*3) Automatic Acoustic Management (AAM)  
The host writes to the Sector Count register with the requested acoustic  
management level and executes this command with subcommand code 42h, and  
then Automatic Acoustic Management is enabled. The AAM level setting is  
preserved by the drive across power on, hardware and software resets.  
AAM Level  
Sector Count Register  
Performance mode (Fast Seek)  
Acoustic mode (Slow Seek)  
Abort  
C0h-FEh  
80h-BFh  
01h-7Fh  
00h, FFh  
Non Operate  
High-speed seek to which gives priority to the performance operates as for  
"Performance mode", and low-speed seek by which the seek sound is suppressed  
operates as for "Acoustic mode".  
Setting the seek mode by this command is applied to the seek operation in all  
command processing.  
5-92  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(29) SECURITY SET PASSWORD (X’F1’)  
This command enables a user password or master password to be set.  
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.24 to the device. The  
device determines the operation of the lock function according to the  
specifications of the Identifier bit and Security level bit in the transferred data.  
(Table 5.25)  
Issuing this command in LOCKED MODE or FROZEN MODE returns the  
Aborted Command error.  
Table 5.24 Contents of SECURITY SET PASSWORD data  
Word  
0
Contents  
Control word  
Bit 0 Identifier  
0 = Sets a user password.  
1 = Sets a master password.  
Bits 1 to 7 Reserved  
Bit 8 Security level  
0 = High  
1 = Maximum  
Bits 9 to 15 Reserved  
1 to 16  
17  
Password (32 bytes)  
Master password version number  
(Valid is Bit 0 = 1)  
18 to 255 Reserved  
Table 5.25 Relationship between combination of Identifier and Security level, and  
operation of the lock function  
Identifier  
User  
Level  
High  
Description  
The specified password is saved as a new user password.  
The lock function is enabled after the device is turned off  
and then on. LOCKED MODE can be canceled using the  
user password or the master password already set.  
User  
Maximum The specified password is saved as a new user password.  
The lock function is enabled after the device is turned off  
and then on. LOCKED MODE can be canceled using the  
user password only. The master password already set  
cannot cancel LOCKED MODE.  
Master  
High or  
The specified password is saved as a new master password.  
Maximum The lock function is not enabled.  
C141-E218  
5-93  
Interface  
At command issuance (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
0
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(ST) Status information  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(ER)  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-94  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(30) SECURITY UNLOCK(X’F2’)  
This command cancels LOCKED MODE.  
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.26 to the device. Operation  
of the device varies as follows depending on whether the host specifies the master  
password.  
When the master password is selected  
When the security level is LOCKED MODE is high, the password is compared  
with the master password already set. If the passwords are the same, LOCKED  
MODE is canceled. Otherwise, the Aborted Command error is returned. If the  
security level in LOCKED MODE is set to the highest level, the Aborted  
Command error is always returned.  
When the user password is selected  
The password is compared with the user password already set. If the passwords  
are the same, LOCKED MODE is canceled. Otherwise, the Aborted Command  
error is returned.  
If the password comparison fails, the device decrements the UNLOCK counter.  
The UNLOCK counter initially has a value of five. When the value of the  
UNLOCK counter reaches zero, this command or the SECURITY ERASE UNIT  
command causes the Aborted Command error until the device is turned off and  
then on, or until a hardware reset is executed. Issuing this command with  
LOCKED MODE canceled (in UNLOCK MODE) has no affect on the UNLOCK  
counter.  
Issuing this command in FROZEN MODE returns the Aborted Command error.  
At command issuance (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
0
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
C141-E218  
5-95  
Interface  
At command completion (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(ST) Status information  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(ER)  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-96  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(31) SECURITY ERASE PREPARE (X’F3’)  
The SECURITY ERASE UNIT command feature is enabled by issuing the  
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE command and then the SECURITY ERASE  
UNIT command. The SECURITY ERASE PREPARE command prevents data  
from being erased unnecessarily by the SECURITY ERASE UNIT command.  
Issuing this command during FROZEN MODE returns the Aborted Command  
error.  
At command issuance (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
0
1
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(ST) Status information  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(ER)  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-97  
Interface  
(32) SECURITY ERASE UNIT (X’F4’)  
This command erases all user data. This command also invalidates the user  
password and releases the lock function.  
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.26 to the device. The  
device compares the user password or master password in the transferred data  
with the user password or master password already set. The device erases user  
data, invalidates the user password, and releases the lock function if the passwords  
are the same.  
Although this command invalidates the user password, the master password is  
retained. To recover the master password, issue the SECURITY SET  
PASSWORD command and reset the user password.  
If the SECURITY ERASE PREPARE command is not issued immediately before  
this command is issued, the Aborted Command error is returned.  
Issuing this command while in FROZEN MODE returns the Aborted Command  
error.  
At command issuance (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
1
0
0
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(ST) Status information  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(ER)  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-98  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(33) SECURITY FREEZE LOCK (X’F5’)  
This command puts the device into FROZEN MODE. The following commands  
used to change the lock function return the Aborted Command error if the device  
is in FROZEN MODE.  
SECURITY SET PASSWORD  
SECURITY UNLOCK  
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE  
SECURITY ERASE UNIT  
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD  
FROZEN MODE is canceled when the power is turned off, or when hardware is  
resented. If this command is reissued in FROZEN MODE, the command is  
completed and FROZEN MODE remains unchanged.  
Issuing this command during LOCKED MODE returns the Aborted Command  
error.  
The following medium access commands return the Aborted Command error  
when the device is in LOCKED MODE:  
READ SECTORS (EXT)  
WRITE SECTORS (EXT)  
WRITE VERIFY  
READ VERIFY SECTORS (EXT)  
READ MULTIPLE (EXT)  
WRITE MULTIPLE (EXT/FUA EXT)  
READ DMA (EXT)  
WRITE DMA (EXT/FUA EXT)  
DEVICE CONFIGURAION RESTORE  
DEVICE CONFIGURAION SET  
SECURITY SET PASSWORD  
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK  
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD  
FLUSH CACHE (EXT)  
SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT)  
C141-E218  
5-99  
Interface  
At command issuance (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
1
0
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(ST) Status information  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(ER)  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-100  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(34) SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD (X’F6’)  
This command invalidates the user password already set and releases the lock  
function.  
The host transfers the 512-byte data shown in Table 5.26 to the device. The  
device compares the user password or master password in the transferred data  
with the user password or master password already set, and releases the lock  
function if the passwords are the same.  
Although this command invalidates the user password, the master password is  
retained. To recover the master password, issue the SECURITY SET  
PASSWORD command and reset the user password.  
If the user password or master password transferred from the host does not match,  
the Aborted Command error is returned.  
Issuing this command while in LOCKED MODE or FROZEN MODE returns the  
Aborted Command error.  
(The section about the SECURITY FREEZE LOCK command describes  
LOCKED MODE and FROZEN MODE.)  
Table 5.26 Contents of security password  
Word  
0
Contents  
Control word  
Bit 0: Identifier  
0 = Compares the user passwords.  
1 = Compares the master passwords.  
Bits 1 to 15: Reserved  
1 to 16  
Password (32 bytes)  
17 to 255 Reserved  
At command issuance (I-O register contents))  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
0
1
1
0
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
C141-E218  
5-101  
Interface  
At command completion (I-O register contents)  
1F7h(ST) Status information  
1F6h(DH)  
1F5h(CH)  
1F4h(CL)  
1F3h(SN)  
1F2h(SC)  
1F1h(ER)  
x
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
x
x
DV xx  
Error information  
5-102  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(35) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS (X’F8’)  
This command posts the maximum address intrinsic to the device, which can be  
set by the SET MAX ADDRESS command. Upon receipt of this command, the  
device sets the BSY bit and indicates the maximum address in the DH, CH, CL  
and SN registers. Then, it clears BSY and generates an interrupt.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
1
x
1
1
0
0
0
L
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
x
x
DV Max head/LBA [MSB]  
Max. cylinder [MSB]/Max. LBA  
Max. cylinder [LSB]/Max. LBA  
Max. sector/Max. LBA [LSB]  
xx  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-103  
Interface  
(36) SET MAX (X’F9’)  
SET MAX features register values  
Value  
Command  
00h  
Obsolete  
01h  
SET MAX SET PASSWORD  
SET MAX LOCK  
SET MAX UNLOCK  
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK  
Reserved  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h - FFh  
SET MAX ADDRESS  
A successful READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command shall immediately  
precede a SET MAX ADDRESS command.  
This command allows the maximum address accessible by the user to be set in  
LBA or CHS mode. Upon receipt of the command, the device sets the BSY bit  
and saves the maximum address specified in the DH, CH, CL and SN registers.  
Then, it clears BSY and generates an interrupt.  
The new address information set by this command is reflected in Words 1, 54, 57,  
58, 60 and 61 of IDENTIFY DEVICE information. If an attempt is made to  
perform a read or write operation for an address beyond the new address space, an  
ID Not Found error will result.  
When SC register bit 0, VV (Value Volatile), is 1, the value set by this command  
is held even after power on and the occurrence of a hard reset. When the VV bit is  
0, the value set by this command becomes invalid when the power is turned on or  
a hard reset occurs, and the maximum address returns to the value most lately set  
when VV bit = 1. (The value by VV bit = 0 is held in case that this command  
with VV bit = 1 has not been issued or had set the default value, and hard reset  
occurs.)  
After power on and the occurrence of a hard reset, the host can issue this  
command only once when VV bit = 1. If this command with VV bit = 1 is issued  
twice or more, any command following the first time will result in an Aborted  
Command error.  
When the SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed, all SET MAX  
ADRESS commands are aborted. The address value returns to the origin when the  
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed using the address value  
returned by the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command.  
5-104  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
1
x
1
1
0
0
1
L
DV Max head/LBA [MSB]  
Max. cylinder [MSB]/Max. LBA  
Max. cylinder [LSB]/Max. LBA  
Max. sector/Max. LBA [LSB]  
xx  
xx  
VV  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
x
x
x
DV Max head/LBA [MSB]  
Max. cylinder [MSB]/Max. LBA  
Max. cylinder [LSB]/Max. LBA  
Max. sector/Max. LBA [LSB]  
xx  
Error information  
SET MAX SET PASSWORD (FR = 01h)  
This command requests a transfer of 1 sector of data from the host, and defines  
the contents of SET MAX password. The password is retained by the device until  
the next power cycle.  
The READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command is not executed just before this  
command. The command is the SET MAX ADDRESS command if it is the  
command just after the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command is executed.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
1
0
0
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
01  
C141-E218  
5-105  
Interface  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
Password information  
Words  
Contents  
0
Reserved  
1 to 16  
Password (32 bytes)  
Reserved  
17 to 255  
SET MAX LOCK (FR = 02h)  
The SET MAX LOCK command sets the device into SET_MAX_LOCK state.  
After this command is completed, any other SET MAX commands except SET  
MAX UNLOCK and SET MAX FREEZE LOCK commands are rejected. And  
the device returns command aborted.  
The device remains in the SET MAX LOCK state until a power cycle or the  
acceptance of SET MAX UNLOCK or SET MAX FREEZE LOCK command.  
The READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command is not executed just before this  
command. The command is the SET MAX ADDRESS command if it is the  
command just after the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command is executed.  
5-106  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
1
0
0
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
02  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
SET MAX UNLOCK (FR = 03h)  
This command requests a transfer of single sector of data from the host, and  
defines the contents of SET MAX ADDRESS password.  
The password supplied in the sector of data transferred shall be compared with the  
stored password.  
If the password compare fails, the device returns command aborted and  
decrements the Unlock counter, and remains in the Set Max Lock state. On the  
acceptance of the SET MAX LOCK command, the Unlock counter is set to a  
value of five. When this counter reaches zero, then SET MAX UNLOCK  
command returns command aborted until a power cycle.  
If the password compare matches, then the device makes a transition to the Set  
Max Unlocked state and all SET MAX commands will be accepted.  
The READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command is not executed just before this  
command. The command is the SET MAX ADDRESS command if it is the  
command just after the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command is executed.  
C141-E218  
5-107  
Interface  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
1
0
0
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
03  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK (FR = 04h)  
The Set MAX FREEZE LOCK command sets the device to SET_MAX_Frozen  
state.  
After the device made a transition to the Set Max Freeze Lock state, the following  
SET MAX commands are rejected, then the device returns command aborted:  
SET MAX ADDRESS  
SET MAX SET PASSWORD  
SET MAX LOCK  
SET MAX UNLOCK  
If the Device is in the SET_MAX_UNLOCK state with the SET MAX FREEZE  
LOCK command, then the device returns command aborted.  
The READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command is not executed just before this  
command. The command is the SET MAX ADDRESS command if it is the  
command just after the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command is executed.  
5-108  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7H(CM)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(FR)  
1
x
1
x
1
x
1
1
0
0
1
DV xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
04  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7H(ST)  
1F6H(DH)  
1F5H(CH)  
1F4H(CL)  
1F3H(SN)  
1F2H(SC)  
1F1H(ER)  
Status information  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
C141-E218  
5-109  
Interface  
(37) READ SECTOR(S) EXT (X’24’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command is the extended command of the READ SECTOR(S) command.  
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum  
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from  
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the READ  
SECTOR(S) command.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
Sector count (15-8)  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
LBA (39-32)  
LBA (15-8)  
LBA (31-24)  
LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
5-110  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(38) READ DMA EXT (X’25’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command is the extended command of the READ DMA command. The  
LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum number  
of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from 100h to  
10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the READ DMA  
command.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
Sector count (15-8)  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
LBA (39-32)  
LBA (15-8)  
LBA (31-24)  
LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
C141-E218  
5-111  
Interface  
(39) READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT (X’27’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command is used to assign the highest address that the device can initially  
set with the SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command. The maximum address is  
displayed in the CH, CL, SN registers of the device control register with HOB bit  
= 0, 1.  
Error reporting conditions  
This command is issued with LBA = 0. (ST = 51h, ER= 04h: Aborted command)  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P xx  
1F5h(CH) C xx  
1F4h(CL) P xx  
1F4h(CL) C xx  
1F3h(SN) P xx  
1F3h(SN) C xx  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C xx  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
xx  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 Native max address LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 Native max address LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
Native max address LBA (39-32)  
Native max address LBA (15-8)  
Native max address LBA (31-24)  
Native max address LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
5-112  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(40) READ MULTIPLE EXT (X’29’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command is the extended command of the READ MULTIPLE command.  
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum  
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from  
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the READ  
MULTIPLE command.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
Sector count (15-8)  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
LBA (39-32)  
LBA (15-8)  
LBA (31-24)  
LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
C141-E218  
5-113  
Interface  
(41) READ LOG EXT (X'2F') [Optional command (Customize)]  
Description  
This command reads data from the general-purpose log of a device. The general-  
purpose log includes the extended SMART comprehensive error log, extended  
self-test log, SMART selective self-test log, and other logs. The types of logs  
available depend on the customize operation. For information on the DRQ,  
INTRQ, and BSY protocols related to the transfer of data, see Section 5.4.1.  
When command is issued (I/O register setting values)  
1F7H (CM)  
1F6H (DH)  
0
x
0
x
1
x
0
1
1
1
1
DV xx  
1F5H (CH) P xx  
1F5H (CH) C xx  
1F4H (CL) P Sector offset (15-8)  
1F4H (CL) C Sector offset (7-0)  
1F3H (SN) P xx  
1F3H (SN) C Log address  
1F2H (SC) P Sector count (15-8)  
1F2H (SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1H (FR) P xx  
1F1H (FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
When command is completed (read data in I/O register)  
1F7H (ST) Status information  
1F6H (DH)  
x
x
x
DV xx  
1F5H (CH) 1  
1F5H (CH) 0  
1F4H (CL) 1  
1F4H (CL) 0  
1F3H (SN) 1  
1F3H (SN) 0  
1F2H (SC) 1  
1F2H (SC) 0  
1F1H (ER)  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
5-114  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Log address: Log number of the log to be read  
Sector offset: First log sector subject to the data transfer  
Sector count: Number of sectors to be read from the specified log  
If the device does not support this command, the device shall return the Command  
Aborted error.  
If the Log address value, the Sector count value, or the Sector offset value is  
invalid, the device shall return the Command Aborted error.  
C141-E218  
5-115  
Interface  
(42) WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT (X’34’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command is the extended command of the WRITE SECTOR (S) command.  
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum  
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from  
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the WRITE  
SECTOR (S) command.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
Sector count (15-8)  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
LBA (39-32)  
LBA (15-8)  
LBA (31-24)  
LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
5-116  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(43) WRITE DMA EXT (X’35’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command is the extended command of the WRITE DMA command. The  
LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum number  
of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from 100h to  
10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the WRITE DMA  
command.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
Sector count (15-8)  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
LBA (39-32)  
LBA (15-8)  
LBA (31-24)  
LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
C141-E218  
5-117  
Interface  
(44) SET MAX ADDRESS EXT (X’37’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command limits specifications so that the highest address that can be  
accessed by users can be specified only in LBA mode.  
The address information specified with this command is set in words 1, 54, 57, 58,  
60, 61, and 100 to 103 of the IDENTIFY DEVICE command response. If read or  
write processing is executed for an address that is outside of the new address  
space, an ID Not Found error occurs.  
If the SC register bit is 0 and the value volatile (VV) bit is 1 when this command  
is executed, the specified values are maintained after a power-on reset. If the VV  
bit is 0 when the command is executed, the specified values are invalidated during  
the power-on sequence. If the VV bit is 1, the highest address value is defined as  
the last value specified. (If the VV bit is not set to 1, the highest address is the  
default value.)  
After a power-on reset is performed, a host can issue the SET MAX ADDRESS  
(EXT) command only once if the VV bit is 1. If the SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT)  
command is issued twice or more, an ID Not Found error occurs.  
When the SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed, all SET MAX  
ADDRESS commands are aborted. The address value returns to the origin when  
the SET MAX ADDRESS EXT command is executed using the address value  
returned by the READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS command.  
Error reporting conditions  
This command is issued twice or more in an operation sequence. (ST = 51h,  
ER = 10h, ID Not Found)  
The READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS EXT command (27h) is not issued  
immediately before this command (ST = 51h, ER = 04h, Aborted) is issued.  
This command is issued while LBA = 0 (ST = 51h, ER = 04h, Aborted)  
The SET MAX ADDRESS command has already been issued.  
5-118  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P SET MAX LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C SET MAX LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P SET MAX LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C SET MAX LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P SET MAX LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C SET MAX LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
xx  
1F2h(SC) C xx  
VV  
1F1h(FR) P  
1F1h(FR) C  
xx  
xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 SET MAX LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 SET MAX LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
SET MAX LBA (39-32)  
SET MAX LBA (15-8)  
SET MAX LBA (31-24)  
SET MAX LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
C141-E218  
5-119  
Interface  
(45) WRITE MULTIPLE EXT (X’39’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command is the extended command of the WRITE MULTIPLE command.  
The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the maximum  
number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is changed from  
100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of the WRITE  
MULTIPLE command.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
Sector count (15-8)  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
LBA (39-32)  
LBA (15-8)  
LBA (31-24)  
LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
5-120  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(46) WRITE DMA FUA EXT (X’3D’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
The WRITE DMA FUA EXT command has the difference that reports on status  
after write to media is completed regardless of the setting of present Write cache  
though WRITE DMA EXT command and basic operation are the same.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
Sector count (15-8)  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
LBA (39-32)  
LBA (15-8)  
LBA (31-24)  
LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
C141-E218  
5-121  
Interface  
(47) WRITE LOG EXT (X’3F’) [Optional command (Customize)]  
Description  
This command writes data to the general-purpose log of a device. The general-  
purpose log includes the extended SMART comprehensive error log, extended  
self-test log, SMART selective self-test log, and other logs. However, some of  
these logs are read-only logs. The types of logs available depend on the customize  
operation. For information on the DRQ, INTRQ, and BSY protocols related to the  
transfer of data, see Section 5.4.1.  
When command is issued (I/O register setting values)  
1F7H (CM)  
1F6H (DH)  
0
x
0
x
1
x
1
1
1
1
1
DV xx  
1F5H (CH) P xx  
1F5H (CH) C xx  
1F4H (CL) P Sector offset (15-8)  
1F4H (CL) C Sector offset (7-0)  
1F3H (SN) P xx  
1F3H (SN) C Log address  
1F2H (SC) P Sector count (15-8)  
1F2H (SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1H (FR) P xx  
1F1H (FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
When command is completed (read data in I/O register)  
1F7H (ST) Status information  
1F6H (DH)  
x
x
x
DV xx  
1F5H (CH) 1  
1F5H (CH) 0  
1F4H (CL) 1  
1F4H (CL) 0  
1F3H (SN) 1  
1F3H (SN) 0  
1F2H (SC) 1  
1F2H (SC) 0  
1F1H (ER)  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
5-122  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
Log address: Log number of the log to be written  
Sector offset: First log sector subject to the data transfer  
Sector count: Number of sectors to be written to the specified log  
If the device does not support this command, the device shall return the Command  
Aborted error.  
If the Log address value, the Sector count value, or the Sector offset value is  
invalid, the device shall return the Command Aborted error.  
C141-E218  
5-123  
Interface  
(48) READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT (X’42): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command is the extended command of the READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)  
command. The LBA specification is increased from 28 bits to 48 bits, and the  
maximum number of sectors that can be transferred by a single command is  
changed from 100h to 10000h. Other command controls are the same as those of  
the READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) command.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
Sector count (15-8)  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
LBA (39-32)  
LBA (15-8)  
LBA (31-24)  
LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
5-124  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
(49) WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT (X’CE’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
The WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT command has the difference that reports on  
status after write to media is completed regardless of the setting of present Write  
cache though WRITE MULTIPLE EXT command and basic operation are the  
same.  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) C LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) P LBA (39-32)  
1F4h(CL) C LBA (15-8)  
1F3h(SN) P LBA (31-24)  
1F3h(SN) C LBA (7-0)  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C Sector count (7-0)  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
Sector count (15-8)  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 LBA (47-40)  
1F5h(CH) 0 LBA (23-16)  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
LBA (39-32)  
LBA (15-8)  
LBA (31-24)  
LBA (7-0)  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
C141-E218  
5-125  
Interface  
(50) FLUSH CACHE EXT (X’EA’): Option (customizing)  
Description  
This command executes the same operation as the Flush Cache command (E7h)  
but only LBA = 1 can be specified.  
Error reporting conditions  
This command is issued with LBA = 0. (ST = 51h, ER= 10h: Aborted)  
At command issuance (I/O registers setting contents)  
1F7h(CM)  
1F6h(DH)  
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
L
DV xx  
1F5h(CH) P xx  
1F5h(CH) C xx  
1F4h(CL) P xx  
1F4h(CL) C xx  
1F3h(SN) P xx  
1F3h(SN) C xx  
1F2h(SC) P  
1F2h(SC) C xx  
1F1h(FR) P xx  
xx  
1F1h(FR) C xx  
C: Current  
P: Previous  
At command completion (I/O registers contents to be read)  
1F7h(ST)  
1F6h(DH)  
Status information  
1 DV xx  
1
L
1F5h(CH) 1 xx  
1F5h(CH) 0 xx  
1F4h(CL) 1  
1F4h(CL) 0  
1F3h(SN) 1  
1F3h(SN) 0  
1F2h(SC) 1  
1F2h(SC) 0  
1F1h(ER)  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
xx  
Error information  
0: HOB=0  
1: HOB=1  
5-126  
C141-E218  
5.3 Host Commands  
5.3.3 Error posting  
Table 5.27 lists the defined errors that are valid for each command.  
Table 5.27 Command code and parameters (1 of 2)  
Error Register (X '1F1')  
Status Register (X '1F7')  
COMMAND NAME  
RECALIBRATE  
ICRC  
UNC  
IDNF  
ABRT TK0NF DRDY  
DWF  
V
ERR  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
*1  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
READ SECTOR(S)  
V
V
V
V
V
V
*1  
V
V
WRITE SECTOR(S)  
WRITE VERIFY  
V
V
V
V
V
V
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)  
SEEK  
V
V
V
V
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC  
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS  
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE  
STANDBY IMMEDIATE  
IDLE (UNLOAD) IMMEDIATE  
STANDBY  
*1  
*1  
*1  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
IDLE  
CHECK POWER MODE  
SLEEP  
SMART  
V
DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
READ MULTIPLE  
V
V
V
V
WRITE MULTIPLE  
SET MULTIPLE MODE  
READ DMA  
V*2  
V*2  
V
V
WRITE DMA  
READ BUFFER  
FLUSH CACHE  
V
WRITE BUFFER  
IDENTIFY DEVICE  
IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA  
SET FEATURES  
SECURITY SET PASSWORD  
SECURITY UNLOCK  
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE  
SECURITY ERASE UNIT  
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK  
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD  
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS  
SET MAX  
V
C141-E218  
5-127  
Interface  
Table 5.27 Command code and parameters (2 of 2)  
Error Register (X '1F1')  
Status Register (X '1F7')  
COMMAND NAME  
ICRC  
V *2  
UNC  
V
IDNF  
V
ABRT TK0NF DRDY  
DWF  
V
ERR  
V
READ SECTOR(S) EXT  
READ DMA EXT  
*O  
*O  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS  
EXT  
V
V
*O  
*O  
*O  
*O  
*O  
*O  
*O  
*O  
*O  
READ MULTIPLE EXT  
READ LOG EXT  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT  
WRITE DMA EXT  
V *2  
V *2  
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT  
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT  
WRITE DMA FUA EXT  
WRITE LOG EXT  
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT*O  
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT *O  
V
FLUSH CACHE EXT  
INVALID COMMAND  
*O  
V:  
Valid on this command  
See the command descriptions.  
*1:  
*2:  
*O:  
Valid only for Ultra DMA command.  
Option (customizing)  
5-128  
C141-E218  
5.4 Command Protocol  
5.4 Command Protocol  
The host should confirm that the BSY bit of the Status register of the device is 0  
prior to issue a command. If BSY bit is 1, the host should wait for issuing a  
command until BSY bit is cleared to 0.  
Commands can be executed only when the DRDY bit of the Status register is 1.  
However, the following commands can be executed even if DRDY bit is 0.  
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC  
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS  
5.4.1 PIO Data transferring commands from device to host  
The execution of the following commands involves data transfer from the device  
to the host.  
READ SECTOR (S) (EXT)  
SMART READ DATA  
SMART READ LOG  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION IDENTIFY  
READ BUFFER  
IDENTIFY DEVICE  
READ LOG EXT  
The execution of these commands includes the transfer one or more sectors of  
data from the device to the host. In the READ LONG command, 516 bytes are  
transferred. Following shows the protocol outline.  
a) The host writes any required parameters to the Features, Sector Count, Sector  
Number, Cylinder, and Device/Head registers.  
b) The host writes a command code to the Command register.  
c) The device sets the BSY bit of the Status register and prepares for data  
transfer.  
d) When one sector of data is available for transfer to the host, the device sets  
DRQ bit and clears BSY bit. The drive then asserts INTRQ signal.  
e) After detecting the INTRQ signal assertion, the host reads the Status register.  
The host reads one sector of data via the Data register. In response to the  
Status register being read, the device negates the INTRQ signal.  
C141-E218  
5-129  
Interface  
f) The drive clears DRQ bit to 0. If transfer of another sector is requested, the  
device sets the BSY bit and steps d) and after are repeated.  
Even if an error is encountered, the device prepares for data transfer by setting the  
DRQ bit. Whether or not to transfer the data is determined for each host. In other  
words, the host should receive the relevant sector of data (512 bytes of uninsured  
dummy data) or release the DRQ status by resetting.  
Figure 5.3 shows an example of READ SECTOR(S) command protocol, and  
Figure 5.4 shows an example protocol for command abort.  
Figure 5.3 READ SECTOR(S) COMMAND protocol  
5-130  
C141-E218  
5.4 Command Protocol  
For transfer of a sector of data, the host needs to read Status register  
(X’1F7’) in order to clear INTRQ (interrupt) signal. The Status  
register should be read within a period from the DRQ setting by the  
device to starting of the sector data transfer. Note that the host does  
not need to read the Status register for the reading of a single sector  
or the last sector in multiple-sector reading. If the timing to read  
the Status register does not meet above condition, normal data  
transfer operation is not guaranteed.  
When the host new command even if the device requests the data  
transfer (setting in DRQ bit), the correct device operation is not  
guaranteed.  
Figure 5.4 Protocol for command abort  
C141-E218  
5-131  
Interface  
5.4.2 PIO Data transferring commands from host to device  
The execution of the following commands involves Data transfer from the host to  
the drive.  
WRITE SECTOR(S) (EXT)  
WRITE VERIFY  
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE  
SMART WRITE LOG  
DEVICE OCNFIGURATION SET  
WRITE BUFFER  
SECURITY SET PASSWORD  
SECURITY UNCLOK  
SECURITY ERASE UNIT  
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD  
WRITE LOG EXT  
The execution of these commands includes the transfer one or more sectors of  
data from the host to the device. In the WRITE LONG command, 516 bytes are  
transferred. Following shows the protocol outline.  
a) The host writes any required parameters to the Features, Sector Count, Sector  
Number, Cylinder, and Device/Head registers.  
b) The host writes a command code in the Command register. The drive sets the  
BSY bit of the Status register.  
c) When the device is ready to receive the data of the first sector, the device sets  
DRQ bit and clears BSY bit.  
d) The host writes one sector of data through the Data register.  
e) The device clears the DRQ bit and sets the BSY bit.  
f) When the drive completes transferring the data of the sector, the device clears  
BSY bit and asserts INTRQ signal. If transfer of another sector is requested,  
the drive sets the DRQ bit.  
g) After detecting the INTRQ signal assertion, the host reads the Status register.  
h) The device resets INTRQ (the interrupt signal).  
i) If transfer of another sector is requested, steps d) and after are repeated.  
Figure 5.5 shows an example of WRITE SECTOR(S) command protocol.  
5-132  
C141-E218  
5.4 Command Protocol  
40 ms  
Figure 5.5 WRITE SECTOR(S) command protocol  
For transfer of a sector of data, the host needs to read Status register  
(X’1F7’) in order to clear INTRQ (interrupt) signal. The Status  
register should be read within a period from the DRQ setting by the  
device to starting of the sector data transfer. Note that the host does  
not need to read the Status register for the first and the last sector to  
be transferred. If the timing to read the Status register does not  
meet above condition, normal data transfer operation is not assured  
guaranteed.  
When the host issues the command even if the drive requests the  
data transfer (DRQ bit is set), or when the host executes resetting,  
the device correct operation is not guaranteed.  
C141-E218  
5-133  
Interface  
5.4.3 Commands without data transfer  
Execution of the following commands does not involve data transfer between the  
host and the device.  
RECABLIBRATE  
READY VERIFY SECTOR(S) (EXT)  
SEEK  
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC  
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS  
STANDBY IMMEDIATE  
IDLE (UNLOAD) IMMEDIATE  
STANDBY  
IDLE  
CHECK POWER MODE  
SLEEP  
SMART ENABLE/DISABLE AUTOSAVE  
SMART EXECUTE OFFLINE IMMEDIATE  
SMART ENABLE OPERATION  
SMART DISABLE OPERATION  
SMART RETURN STATUS  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION RESTORE  
DEVICE CONFIGURAION FREEZE LOCK  
SET MULTIPLE MODE  
FLUSH CACHE (EXT)  
SET FEATURES  
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE  
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK  
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS (EXT)  
SET MAX ADDRESS (EXT)  
Figure 5.6 shows the protocol for the command execution without data transfer.  
5-134  
C141-E218  
5.4 Command Protocol  
Figure 5.6 Protocol for the command execution without data transfer  
5.4.4 Other commands  
READ MULTIPLE (EXT)  
WRITE MULTIPLE (EXT/FUA EXT)  
SLEEP  
See the description of each command.  
5.4.5 DMA data transfer commands  
READ DMA (EXT)  
WRITE DMA (EXT/FUA EXT)  
INDENTIFY DEVICE DMA  
Starting the DMA transfer command is the same as the READ SECTOR(S) or  
WRITE SECTOR(S) command except the point that the host initializes the DMA  
channel preceding the command issuance.  
Interruption processing for DMA transfer does not issue interruptions in any  
intermediate sector when a multisector command is executed.  
The following outlines the protocol:  
The interrupt processing for the DMA transfer differs the following point.  
The interrupt processing for the DMA transfer differs the following point.  
a) The host writes any parameters to the Features, Sector Count, Sector Number,  
Cylinder, and Device/Head register.  
b) The host initializes the DMA channel  
c) The host writes a command code in the Command register.  
d) The device sets the BSY bit of the Status register.  
e) The device asserts the DMARQ signal after completing the preparation of  
data transfer. The device asserts either the BSY bit or DRQ bit during DMA  
data transfer.  
C141-E218  
5-135  
Interface  
f) When the command execution is completed, the device clears both BSY and  
DRQ bits and asserts the INTRQ signal. Then, the host reads the Status  
register.  
g) The host resets the DMA channel.  
Figure 5.7 shows the correct DMA data transfer protocol.  
f
g
d
d
f
e
Figure 5.7 Normal DMA data transfer  
5-136  
C141-E218  
5.5 Ultra DMA Feature Set  
5.5 Ultra DMA Feature Set  
5.5.1 Overview  
Ultra DMA is a data transfer protocol used with the READ DMA and WRITE  
DMA commands. When this protocol is enabled it shall be used instead of the  
Multiword DMA protocol when these commands are issued by the host. This  
protocol applies to the Ultra DMA data burst only. When this protocol is used  
there are no changes to other elements of the ATA protocol (e.g.: Command  
Block Register access).  
Several signal lines are redefined to provide new functions during an Ultra DMA  
burst. These lines assume these definitions when 1) an Ultra DMA Mode is  
selected, and 2) a host issues a READ DMA or a WRITE DMA, command  
requiring data transfer, and 3) the host asserts DMACK-. These signal lines revert  
back to the definitions used for non-Ultra DMA transfers upon the negation of  
DMACK- by the host at the termination of an Ultra DMA burst. All of the control  
signals are unidirectional. DMARQ and DMACK- retain their standard  
definitions.  
With the Ultra DMA protocol, the control signal (STROBE) that latches data from  
DD (15:0) is generated by the same agent (either host or device) that drives the  
data onto the bus. Ownership of DD (15:0) and this data strobe signal are given  
either to the device during an Ultra DMA data in burst or to the host for an Ultra  
DMA data out burst.  
During an Ultra DMA burst a sender shall always drive data onto the bus, and  
after a sufficient time to allow for propagation delay, cable settling, and setup  
time, the sender shall generate a STROBE edge to latch the data. Both edges of  
STROBE are used for data transfers so that the frequency of STROBE is limited  
to the same frequency as the data.  
Words in the IDENTIFY DEVICE data indicate support of the Ultra DMA feature  
and the Ultra DMA Modes the device is capable of supporting. The Set transfer  
mode subcommand in the SET FEATURES command shall be used by a host to  
select the Ultra DMA Mode at which the system operates. The Ultra DMA Mode  
selected by a host shall be less than or equal to the fastest mode of which the  
device is capable. Only the Ultra DMA Mode shall be selected at any given time.  
All timing requirements for a selected Ultra DMA Mode shall be satisfied.  
Devices supporting Ultra DMA Mode 2 shall also support Ultra DMA Modes 0  
and 1. Devices supporting Ultra DMA Mode 1 shall also support Ultra DMA  
Mode 0.  
An Ultra DMA capable device shall retain its previously selected Ultra DMA  
Mode after executing a Software reset sequence. An Ultra DMA capable device  
shall clear any previously selected Ultra DMA Mode and revert to its default non-  
Ultra DMA Modes after executing a Power on or hardware reset.  
C141-E218  
5-137  
Interface  
Both the host and device perform a CRC function during an Ultra DMA burst. At  
the end of an Ultra DMA burst the host sends the its CRC data to the device. The  
device compares its CRC data to the data sent from the host. If the two values do  
not match the device reports an error in the error register at the end of the  
command. If an error occurs during one or more Ultra DMA bursts for any one  
command, at the end of the command, the device shall report the first error that  
occurred.  
5.5.2 Phases of operation  
An Ultra DMA data transfer is accomplished through a series of Ultra DMA data  
in or data out bursts. Each Ultra DMA burst has three mandatory phases of  
operation: the initiation phase, the data transfer phase, and the Ultra DMA burst  
termination phase. In addition, an Ultra DMA burst may be paused during the  
data transfer phase (see 5.5.3 and 5.5.4 for the detailed protocol descriptions for  
each of these phases, 5.6 defines the specific timing requirements). In the  
following rules DMARDY- is used in cases that could apply to either  
DDMARDY- or HDMARDY-, and STROBE is used in cases that could apply to  
either DSTROBE or HSTROBE. The following are general Ultra DMA rules.  
a) An Ultra DMA burst is defined as the period from an assertion of DMACK-  
by the host to the subsequent negation of DMACK-.  
b) A recipient shall be prepared to receive at least two data words whenever it  
enters or resumes an Ultra DMA burst.  
5.5.3 Ultra DMA data in commands  
5.5.3.1 Initiating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
The following steps shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.1 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing requirements):  
1) The host shall keep DMACK- in the negated state before an Ultra DMA burst  
is initiated.  
2) The device shall assert DMARQ to initiate an Ultra DMA burst. After  
assertion of DMARQ the device shall not negate DMARQ until after the first  
negation of DSTROBE.  
3) Steps (3), (4) and (5) may occur in any order or at the same time. The host  
shall assert STOP.  
4) The host shall negate HDMARDY-.  
5) The host shall negate CS0-, CS1-, DA2, DA1, and DA0. The host shall keep  
CS0-, CS1-, DA2, DA1, and DA0 negated until after negating DMACK- at  
the end of the burst.  
6) Steps (3), (4) and (5) shall have occurred at least tACK before the host asserts  
DMACK-. The host shall keep DMACK- asserted until the end of an Ultra  
DMA burst.  
5-138  
C141-E218  
5.5 Ultra DMA Feature Set  
7) The host shall release DD (15:0) within tAZ after asserting DMACK-.  
8) The device may assert DSTROBE tZIORDY after the host has asserted DMACK-.  
Once the device has driven DSTROBE the device shall not release  
DSTROBE until after the host has negated DMACK- at the end of an Ultra  
DMA burst.  
9) The host shall negate STOP and assert HDMARDY- within tENV after  
asserting DMACK-. After negating STOP and asserting HDMARDY-, the  
host shall not change the state of either signal until after receiving the first  
transition of DSTROBE from the device (i.e., after the first data word has  
been received).  
10) The device shall drive DD (15:0) no sooner than tZAD after the host has  
asserted DMACK-, negated STOP, and asserted HDMARDY-.  
11) The device shall drive the first word of the data transfer onto DD (15:0). This  
step may occur when the device first drives DD (15:0) in step (10).  
12) To transfer the first word of data the device shall negate DSTROBE within tFS  
after the host has negated STOP and asserted HDMARDY-. The device shall  
negate DSTROBE no sooner than tDVS after driving the first word of data onto  
DD (15:0).  
5.5.3.2 The data in transfer  
The following steps shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.3 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing requirements):  
1) The device shall drive a data word onto DD (15:0).  
2) The device shall generate a DSTROBE edge to latch the new word no sooner  
than tDVS after changing the state of DD (15:0). The device shall generate a  
DSTROBE edge no more frequently than tCYC for the selected Ultra DMA  
Mode. The device shall not generate two rising or two falling DSTROBE  
edges more frequently than 2tCYC for the selected Ultra DMA mode.  
3) The device shall not change the state of DD (15:0) until at least tDVH after  
generating a DSTROBE edge to latch the data.  
4) The device shall repeat steps (1), (2) and (3) until the data transfer is  
complete or an Ultra DMA burst is paused, whichever occurs first.  
5.5.3.3 Pausing an Ultra DMA data in burst  
The following steps shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.4 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing requirements).  
a) Device pausing an Ultra DMA data in burst  
1) The device shall not pause an Ultra DMA burst until at least one data  
word of an Ultra DMA burst has been transferred.  
C141-E218  
5-139  
Interface  
2) The device shall pause an Ultra DMA burst by not generating DSTROBE  
edges.  
NOTE - The host shall not immediately assert STOP to initiate Ultra  
DMA burst termination when the device stops generating  
STROBE edges. If the device does not negate DMARQ, in  
order to initiate ULTRA DMA burst termination, the host shall  
negate HDMARDY- and wait tRP before asserting STOP.  
3) The device shall resume an Ultra DMA burst by generating a DSTROBE  
edge.  
b) Host pausing an Ultra DMA data in burst  
1) The host shall not pause an Ultra DMA burst until at least one data word  
of an Ultra DMA burst has been transferred.  
2) The host shall pause an Ultra DMA burst by negating HDMARDY-.  
3) The device shall stop generating DSTROBE edges within tRFS of the host  
negating HDMARDY-.  
4) If the host negates HDMARDY- within tSR after the device has generated  
a DSTROBE edge, then the host shall be prepared to receive zero or one  
additional data words. If the host negates HDMARDY- greater than tSR  
after the device has generated a DSTROBE edge, then the host shall be  
prepared to receive zero, one or two additional data words. The  
additional data words are a result of cable round trip delay and tRFS timing  
for the device.  
5) The host shall resume an Ultra DMA burst by asserting HDMARDY-.  
5.5.3.4 Terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
a) Device terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
The following steps shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.5 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing  
requirements):  
1) The device shall initiate termination of an Ultra DMA burst by not  
generating DSTROBE edges.  
2) The device shall negate DMARQ no sooner than tSS after generating the  
last DSTROBE edge. The device shall not assert DMARQ again until  
after the Ultra DMA burst is terminated.  
3) The device shall release DD (15:0) no later than tAZ after negating  
DMARQ.  
4) The host shall assert STOP within tLI after the device has negated  
DMARQ. The host shall not negate STOP again until after the Ultra  
DMA burst is terminated.  
5) The host shall negate HDMARDY- within tLI after the device has negated  
DMARQ. The host shall continue to negate HDMARDY- until the Ultra  
DMA burst is terminated. Steps (4) and (5) may occur at the same time.  
5-140  
C141-E218  
5.5 Ultra DMA Feature Set  
6) The host shall drive DD (15:0) no sooner than tZAH after the device has  
negated DMARQ. For this step, the host may first drive DD (15:0) with  
the result of its CRC calculation (see 5.5.5):  
7) If DSTROBE is negated, the device shall assert DSTROBE within tLI  
after the host has asserted STOP. No data shall be transferred during this  
assertion. The host shall ignore this transition on DSTROBE.  
DSTROBE shall remain asserted until the Ultra DMA burst is  
terminated.  
8) If the host has not placed the result of its CRC calculation on DD (15:0)  
since first driving DD (15:0) during (6), the host shall place the result of  
its CRC calculation on DD (15:0) (see 5.5.5).  
9) The host shall negate DMACK- no sooner than tMLI after the device has  
asserted DSTROBE and negated DMARQ and the host has asserted  
STOP and negated HDMARDY-, and no sooner than tDVS after the host  
places the result of its CRC calculation on DD (15:0).  
10) The device shall latch the host's CRC data from DD (15:0) on the  
negating edge of DMACK-.  
11) The device shall compare the CRC data received from the host with the  
results of its own CRC calculation. If a miscompare error occurs during  
one or more Ultra DMA bursts for any one command, at the end of the  
command the device shall report the first error that occurred (see 5.5.5).  
12) The device shall release DSTROBE within tIORDYZ after the host negates  
DMACK-.  
13) The host shall not negate STOP no assert HDMARDY- until at least tACK  
after negating DMACK-.  
14) The host shall not assert DIOR-, CS0-, CS1-, DA2, DA1, or DA0 until at  
least tACK after negating DMACK.  
b) Host terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
The following steps shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.6 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing  
requirements):  
1) The host shall not initiate Ultra DMA burst termination until at least one  
data word of an Ultra DMA burst has been transferred.  
2) The host shall initiate Ultra DMA burst termination by negating  
HDMARDY-. The host shall continue to negate HDMARDY- until the  
Ultra DMA burst is terminated.  
3) The device shall stop generating DSTROBE edges within tRFS of the host  
negating HDMARDY-.  
C141-E218  
5-141  
Interface  
4) If the host negates HDMARDY- within tSR after the device has generated  
a DSTROBE edge, then the host shall be prepared to receive zero or one  
additional data words. If the host negates HDMARDY- greater than tSR  
after the device has generated a DSTROBE edge, then the host shall be  
prepared to receive zero, one or two additional data words. The  
additional data words are a result of cable round trip delay and tRFS timing  
for the device.  
5) The host shall assert STOP no sooner than tRP after negating  
HDMARDY-. The host shall not negate STOP again until after the Ultra  
DMA burst is terminated.  
6) The device shall negate DMARQ within tLI after the host has asserted  
STOP. The device shall not assert DMARQ again until after the Ultra  
DMA burst is terminated.  
7) If DSTROBE is negated, the device shall assert DSTROBE within tLI  
after the host has asserted STOP. No data shall be transferred during this  
assertion. The host shall ignore this transition on DSTROBE.  
DSTROBE shall remain asserted until the Ultra DMA burst is  
terminated.  
8) The device shall release DD (15:0) no later than tAZ after negating  
DMARQ.  
9) The host shall drive DD (15:0) no sooner than tZAH after the device has  
negated DMARQ. For this step, the host may first drive DD (15:0) with  
the result of its CRC calculation (see 5.5.5).  
10) If the host has not placed the result of its CRC calculation on DD (15:0)  
since first driving DD (15:0) during (9), the host shall place the result of  
its CRC calculation on DD (15:0) (see 5.5.5).  
11) The host shall negate DMACK- no sooner than tMLI after the device has  
asserted DSTROBE and negated DMARQ and the host has asserted  
STOP and negated HDMARDY-, and no sooner than tDVS after the host  
places the result of its CRC calculation on DD (15:0).  
12) The device shall latch the host's CRC data from DD (15:0) on the  
negating edge of DMACK-.  
13) The device shall compare the CRC data received from the host with the  
results of its own CRC calculation. If a miscompare error occurs during  
one or more Ultra DMA burst for any one command, at the end of the  
command, the device shall report the first error that occurred (see 5.5.5).  
14) The device shall release DSTROBE within tIORDYZ after the host negates  
DMACK-.  
15) The host shall neither negate STOP nor assert HDMARDY- until at least  
tACK after the host has negated DMACK-.  
16) The host shall not assert DIOR-, CS0-, CS1-, DA2, DA1, or DA0 until at  
least tACK after negating DMACK.  
5-142  
C141-E218  
5.5 Ultra DMA Feature Set  
5.5.4 Ultra DMA data out commands  
5.5.4.1 Initiating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
The following steps shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.7 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing requirements):  
1) The host shall keep DMACK- in the negated state before an Ultra DMA burst  
is initiated.  
2) The device shall assert DMARQ to initiate an Ultra DMA burst.  
3) Steps (3), (4), and (5) may occur in any order or at the same time. The host  
shall assert STOP.  
4) The host shall assert HSTROBE.  
5) The host shall negate CS0-, CS1-, DA2, DA1, and DA0. The host shall keep  
CS0-, CS1-, DA2, DA1, and DA0 negated until after negating DMACK- at  
the end of the burst.  
6) Steps (3), (4), and (5) shall have occurred at least tACK before the host asserts  
DMACK-. The host shall keep DMACK- asserted until the end of an Ultra  
DMA burst.  
7) The device may negate DDMARDY- tZIORDY after the host has asserted  
DMACK-. Once the device has negated DDMARDY-, the device shall not  
release DDMARDY- until after the host has negated DMACK- at the end of  
an Ultra DMA burst.  
8) The host shall negate STOP within tENV after asserting DMACK-. The host  
shall not assert STOP until after the first negation of HSTROBE.  
9) The device shall assert DDMARDY- within tLI after the host has negated  
STOP. After asserting DMARQ and DDMARDY- the device shall not  
negate either signal until after the first negation of HSTROBE by the host.  
10) The host shall drive the first word of the data transfer onto DD (15:0). This  
step may occur any time during Ultra DMA burst initiation.  
11) To transfer the first word of data: the host shall negate HSTROBE no sooner  
than tLI after the device has asserted DDMARDY-. The host shall negate  
HSTROBE no sooner than tDVS after the driving the first word of data onto DD  
(15:0).  
C141-E218  
5-143  
Interface  
5.5.4.2 The data out transfer  
The following steps shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.8 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing requirements):  
1) The host shall drive a data word onto DD (15:0).  
2) The host shall generate an HSTROBE edge to latch the new word no sooner  
than tDVS after changing the state of DD (15:0). The host shall generate an  
HSTROBE edge no more frequently than tCYC for the selected Ultra DMA  
Mode. The host shall not generate two rising or falling HSTROBE edges  
more frequently than 2 tCYC for the selected Ultra DMA mode.  
3) The host shall not change the state of DD (15:0) until at least tDVH after  
generating an HSTROBE edge to latch the data.  
4) The host shall repeat steps (1), (2) and (3) until the data transfer is complete  
or an Ultra DMA burst is paused, whichever occurs first.  
5.5.4.3 Pausing an Ultra DMA data out burst  
The following steps shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.9 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing requirements).  
a) Host pausing an Ultra DMA data out burst  
1) The host shall not pause an Ultra DMA burst until at least one data word  
of an Ultra DMA burst has been transferred.  
2) The host shall pause an Ultra DMA burst by not generating an  
HSTROBE edge.  
Note: The device shall not immediately negate DMARQ to initiate Ultra  
DMA burst termination when the host stops generating HSTROBE  
edges. If the host does not assert STOP, in order to initiate Ultra  
DMA burst termination, the device shall negate DDMARDY- and  
wait tRP before negating DMARQ.  
3) The host shall resume an Ultra DMA burst by generating an HSTROBE edge.  
b) Device pausing an Ultra DMA data out burst  
1) The device shall not pause an Ultra DMA burst until at least one data  
word of an Ultra DMA burst has been transferred.  
2) The device shall pause an Ultra DMA burst by negating DDMARDY-.  
3) The host shall stop generating HSTROBE edges within tRFS of the device  
negating DDMARDY-.  
4) If the device negates DDMARDY- within tSR after the host has generated an  
HSTROBE edge, then the device shall be prepared to receive zero or one  
additional data words. If the device negates DDMARDY- greater than tSR  
after the host has generated an HSTROBE edge, then the device shall be  
prepared to receive zero, one or two additional data words. The additional  
data words are a result of cable round trip delay and tRFS timing for the host.  
5) The device shall resume an Ultra DMA burst by asserting DDMARDY-.  
5-144  
C141-E218  
5.5 Ultra DMA Feature Set  
5.5.4.4 Terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
a) Host terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
The following stops shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.10 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing  
requirements):  
1) The host shall initiate termination of an Ultra DMA burst by not  
generating HSTROBE edges.  
2) The host shall assert STOP no sooner than tSS after it last generated an  
HSTROBE edge. The host shall not negate STOP again until after the  
Ultra DMA burst is terminated.  
3) The device shall negate DMARQ within tLI after the host asserts STOP.  
The device shall not assert DMARQ again until after the Ultra DMA  
burst is terminated.  
4) The device shall negate DDMARDY- with tLI after the host has negated  
STOP. The device shall not assert DDMARDY- again until after the  
Ultra DMA burst termination is complete.  
5) If HSTROBE is negated, the host shall assert HSTROBE with tLI after the  
device has negated DMARQ. No data shall be transferred during this  
assertion. The device shall ignore this transition on HSTROBE.  
HSTROBE shall remain asserted until the Ultra DMA burst is  
terminated.  
6) The host shall place the result of its CRC calculation on DD (15:0) (see  
5.5.5)  
7) The host shall negate DMACK- no sooner than tMLI after the host has  
asserted HSTROBE and STOP and the device has negated DMARQ and  
DDMARDY-, and no sooner than tDVS after placing the result of its CRC  
calculation on DD (15:0).  
8) The device shall latch the host's CRC data from DD (15:0) on the  
negating edge of DMACK-.  
9) The device shall compare the CRC data received from the host with the  
results of its own CRC calculation. If a miscompare error occurs during  
one or more Ultra DMA bursts for any one command, at the end of the  
command, the device shall report the first error that occurred (see 5.5.5).  
10) The device shall release DDMARDY- within tIORDYZ after the host has  
negated DMACK-.  
11) The host shall neither negate STOP nor negate HSTROBE until at least  
tACK after negating DMACK-.  
12) The host shall not assert DIOW-, CS0-, CS1-, DA2, DA1, or DA0 until at  
least tACK after negating DMACK.  
C141-E218  
5-145  
Interface  
b) Device terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
The following steps shall occur in the order they are listed unless otherwise  
specifically allowed (see 5.6.3.11 and 5.6.3.2 for specific timing  
requirements):  
1) The device shall not initiate Ultra DMA burst termination until at least  
one data word of an Ultra DMA burst has been transferred.  
2) The device shall initiate Ultra DMA burst termination by negating  
DDMARDY-.  
3) The host shall stop generating an HSTROBE edges within tRFS of the  
device negating DDMARDY-.  
4) If the device negates DDMARDY- within tSR after the host has generated  
an HSTROBE edge, then the device shall be prepared to receive zero or  
one additional data words. If the device negates DDMARDY- greater  
than tSR after the host has generated an HSTROBE edge, then the device  
shall be prepared to receive zero, one or two additional data words. The  
additional data words are a result of cable round trip delay and tRFS timing  
for the host.  
5) The device shall negate DMARQ no sooner than tRP after negating  
DDMARDY-. The device shall not assert DMARQ again until after the  
Ultra DMA burst is terminated.  
6) The host shall assert STOP with tLI after the device has negated DMARQ.  
The host shall not negate STOP again until after the Ultra DMA burst is  
terminated.  
7) If HSTROBE is negated, the host shall assert HSTROBE with tLI after the  
device has negated DMARQ. No data shall be transferred during this  
assertion. The device shall ignore this transition of HSTROBE.  
HSTROBE shall remain asserted until the Ultra DMA burst is  
terminated.  
8) The host shall place the result of its CRC calculation on DD (15:0) (see  
5.5.5).  
9) The host shall negate DMACK- no sooner than tMLI after the host has  
asserted HSTROBE and STOP and the device has negated DMARQ and  
DDMARDY-, and no sooner than tDVS after placing the result of its CRC  
calculation on DD (15:0).  
10) The device shall latch the host's CRC data from DD (15:0) on the  
negating edge of DMACK-.  
11) The device shall compare the CRC data received from the host with the  
results of its own CRC calculation. If a miscompare error occurs during  
one or more Ultra DMA bursts for any one command, at the end of the  
command, the device shall report the first error that occurred (see 5.5.5).  
12) The device shall release DDMARDY- within tIORDYZ after the host has negated  
DMACK-.  
5-146  
C141-E218  
5.5 Ultra DMA Feature Set  
13) The host shall neither negate STOP nor HSTROBE until at least tACK after  
negating DMACK-.  
14) The host shall not assert DIOW-, CS0-, CS1-, DA2, DA1, or DA0 until  
at least tACK after negating DMACK.  
5.5.5 Ultra DMA CRC rules  
The following is a list of rules for calculating CRC, determining if a CRC error  
has occurred during an Ultra DMA burst, and reporting any error that occurs at  
the end of a command.  
a) Both the host and the device shall have a 16-bit CRC calculation function.  
b) Both the host and the device shall calculate a CRC value for each Ultra DMA  
burst.  
c) The CRC function in the host and the device shall be initialized with a seed of  
4ABAh at the beginning of an Ultra DMA burst before any data is  
transferred.  
d) For each STROBE transition used for data transfer, both the host and the  
device shall calculate a new CRC value by applying the CRC polynomial to  
the current value of their individual CRC functions and the word being  
transferred. CRC is not calculated for the return of STROBE to the asserted  
state after the Ultra DMA burst termination request has been acknowledged.  
e) At the end of any Ultra DMA burst the host shall send the results of its CRC  
calculation function to the device on DD (15:0) with the negation of  
DMACK-.  
f) The device shall then compare the CRC data from the host with the calculated  
value in its own CRC calculation function. If the two values do not match,  
the device shall save the error and report it at the end of the command. A  
subsequent Ultra DMA burst for the same command that does not have a  
CRC error shall not clear an error saved from a previous Ultra DMa burst in  
the same command. If a miscompare error occurs during one or more Ultra  
DMA bursts for any one command, at the end of the command, the device  
shall report the first error that occurred.  
g) For READ DMA or WRITE DMA commands: When a CRC error is  
detected, it shall be reported by setting both ICRC and ABRT (bit 7 and bit 2  
in the Error register) to one. ICRC is defined as the "Interface CRC Error"  
bit. The host shall respond to this error by re-issuing the command.  
h) A host may send extra data words on the last Ultra DMA burst of a data out  
command. If a device determines that all data has been transferred for a  
command, the device shall terminate the burst. A device may have already  
received more data words than were required for the command. These extra  
words are used by both the host and the device to calculate the CRC, but, on  
an Ultra DMA data out burst, the extra words shall be discarded by the  
device.  
C141-E218  
5-147  
Interface  
i) The CRC generator polynomial is : G (X) = X16 + X12 + X5 + 1.  
Note: Since no bit clock is available, the recommended approach for  
calculating CRC is to use a word clock derived from the bus strobe.  
The combinational logic shall then be equivalent to shifting sixteen  
bits serially through the generator polynomial where DD0 is shifted in  
first and DD15 is shifted in last.  
5.5.6 Series termination required for Ultra DMA  
Series termination resistors are required at both the host and the device for  
operation in any of the Ultra DMA Modes. The following table describes  
recommended values for series termination at the host and the device.  
Table 5.28 Recommended series termination for Ultra DMA  
Signal  
DIOR-:HDMARDY-:HSTROBE  
DIOW-:STOP  
Host Termination  
22 ohm  
Device Termination  
82 ohm  
22 ohm  
82 ohm  
CS0-, CS1-  
33 ohm  
82 ohm  
DA0, DA1, DA2  
DMACK-  
33 ohm  
82 ohm  
22 ohm  
82 ohm  
DD15 through DD0  
DMARQ  
33 ohm  
33 ohm  
82 ohm  
22 ohm  
INTRQ  
82 ohm  
22 ohm  
IORDY:DDMARDY-:DSTROBE  
RESET-  
82 ohm  
22 ohm  
33 ohm  
82 ohm  
Note: Only those signals requiring termination are listed in this table. If a signal is not listed,  
series termination is not required for operation in an Ultra DMA Mode. For signals also  
requiring a pull-up or pull-down resistor at the host see Figure 5.8.  
Vcc  
Figure 5.8 Ultra DMA termination with pull-up or pull-down  
5-148  
C141-E218  
5.6 Timing  
5.6 Timing  
5.6.1 PIO data transfer  
Figure 5.9 shows of the data transfer timing between the device and the host  
system.  
t0  
Addresses  
t1  
t9  
t2  
DIOR-/DIOW-  
t2i  
Write data  
DD0-DD15  
t3  
t4  
Read data  
DD0-DD15  
t5  
t6  
t10  
t11  
IORDY  
t12  
Symbol  
Timing parameter  
Min. Max. Unit  
t0  
t1  
Cycle time  
120  
25  
70  
25  
20  
10  
5
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Data register selection setup time for DIOR-/DIOW-  
Pulse width of DIOR-/DIOW-  
t2  
t2i  
t3  
Recovery time of DIOR-/DIOW-  
Data setup time for DIOW-  
t4  
Data hold time for DIOW-  
t5  
Time from DIOR- assertion to read data available  
Data hold time for DIOR-  
50  
t6  
t9  
Data register selection hold time for DIOR-/DIOW-  
10  
0
t10  
t11  
t12  
Time from DIOR-/DIOW- assertion to IORDY "low" level  
Time from validity of read data to IORDY "high" level  
Pulse width of IORDY  
35  
1,250  
Figure 5.9 PIO data transfer timing  
C141-E218  
5-149  
Interface  
5.6.2 Multiword data transfer  
Figure 5.10 shows the multiword DMA data transfer timing between the device  
and the host system.  
DMACK-  
t
I
DIOR-/DIOW-  
t
D
Symbol  
Timing parameter  
Min. Max. Unit  
t0  
tD  
tE  
tF  
tG  
tH  
tI  
Cycle time  
120  
70  
5
50  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Pulse width of DIOR-/DIOW-  
Data Access time for DIOR-  
Data hold time for DIOR-  
Data setup time for DIOR-/DIOW-  
Data hold time for DIOW-  
20  
10  
0
DMACK setup time for DIOR-/DIOW-  
CS (1:0) Available time for DIOR-/DIOW-  
t
25  
Figure 5.10 Multiword DMA data transfer timing (mode 2)  
5-150  
C141-E218  
5.6 Timing  
5.6.3 Ultra DMA data transfer  
Figures 5.11 through 5.20 define the timings associated with all phases of Ultra  
DMA bursts.  
Table 5.23 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
5.6.3.1 Initiating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
DMARQ  
(device)  
tUI  
DMACK-  
(host)  
tFS  
tACK  
tENV  
tZAD  
STOP  
(host)  
tACK  
tFS  
tENV  
HDMARDY-  
(host)  
tZAD  
tZFS  
tZIORDY  
DSTROBE  
(device)  
tDZFS  
tVDS  
tAZ  
tDVH  
DD (15:0)  
tACK  
DA0,DA1,DA2,  
CS0-,CS1-  
Note:  
The definitions for the STOP, HDMARDY-and DSTROBE signal lines are  
not in effect until DMARQ and DMACK- are asserted.  
Figure 5.11 Initiating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
C141-E218  
5-151  
Interface  
5.6.3.2 Ultra DMA data burst timing requirements  
Table 5.29 Ultra DMA data burst timing requirements (1 of 2)  
NAME MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
COMMENT  
MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX  
240  
112  
160  
73  
120  
54  
90  
39  
60  
25  
40  
Typical sustained average two  
cycle time  
t2CYCTYP  
tCYC  
16.8  
Cycle time allowing for  
asymmetry and clock variations  
(from STROBE edge to STROBE  
edge)  
230  
153  
115  
86  
57  
38  
Two cycle time allowing for  
clock variations (from rising edge  
to next rising edge or from falling  
edge to next falling edge of  
STROBE)  
t2CYC  
15  
5
10  
5
7
5
7
5
5
5
4
Data setup time at recipient (from  
data valid until STROBE edge)  
(*2), (*5)  
tDS  
4.6  
Data hold time at recipient (from  
STROBE edge until data may  
become invalid) (*2), (*5)  
tDH  
70  
6.2  
15  
48  
6.2  
10  
31  
6.2  
7
20  
6.2  
7
6.7  
6.2  
5
4.8  
4.8  
5
Data valid setup time at sender  
(from data valid until STROBE  
edge) (*3)  
tDVS  
tDVH  
tCS  
Data valid hold time at sender  
(from STROBE edge until data  
may become invalid) (*3)  
CRC word setup time at device  
(*2)  
5
5
5
5
5
5
CRC word hold time device (*2)  
tCH  
70  
48  
31  
20  
6.7  
10  
CRC word valid setup time at  
host (from CRC valid until  
DMACK-negation) (*3)  
tCVS  
6.2  
6.2  
6.2  
6.2  
6.2  
10  
CRC word valid hold time at  
sender (from DMACK-negation  
until CRC may become invalid)  
(*3)  
tCVH  
0
0
0
0
0
35  
25  
Time from STROBE output  
released-to-driving until the first  
transition of critical timing  
tZFS  
tDZFS  
tFS  
70  
48  
31  
20  
6.7  
Time from data output released-  
to-driving until the first transition  
of critical timing  
230  
200  
170  
130  
120  
90 First STROBE time (for device to  
first negate DSTROBE from  
STOP during a data in burst)  
5-152  
C141-E218  
5.6 Timing  
Table 5.29 Ultra DMA data burst timing requirements (2 of 2)  
NAME MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
COMMENT  
MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX  
0
20  
0
150  
10  
0
20  
0
150  
10  
0
20  
0
150  
10  
0
20  
0
100  
10  
0
20  
0
100  
10  
0
20  
0
75 Limited interlock time (*1)  
Interlock time with minimum (*1)  
Unlimited interlock time (*1)  
tLI  
tMLI  
TUI  
tAZ  
10 Maximum time allowed for output  
drivers to release (from asserted or  
negated)  
tZAH  
tZAD  
tENV  
20  
0
20  
0
20  
0
20  
0
20  
0
20  
0
Minimum delay time required for  
output  
Drivers to assert or negate (from  
released)  
20  
70  
75  
20  
70  
70  
20  
70  
60  
20  
55  
60  
20  
55  
60  
20  
50 Envelope time (from DMACK- to  
STOP and HDMARDY- during  
data in burst initiation and from  
DMACK to STOP during data out  
burst initiation)  
tRFS  
50 Ready-to-final-STROBE time (no  
STROBE edges shall be sent this  
long after negation of DMARDY-)  
tRP  
160  
125  
100  
100  
100  
85  
Ready-to-pause time (that  
recipient shall wait to pause after  
negating DMARDY-)  
tIORDYZ  
tZIORDY  
tACK  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20 Maximum time before releasing  
IORDY  
0
0
0
0
0
0
Minimum time before driving  
IORDY (*4)  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
Setup and hold times for  
DMACK- (before assertion or  
negation)  
tSS  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
50  
Time from STROBE edge to  
negation of DMARQ or assertion  
of STOP (when sender terminates  
a burst)  
*1: Except for some instances of tMLI that apply to host signals only, the parameters tUI, tMLI and tLI indicate sender-to-recipient or recipient-  
to-sender interlocks, i.e., one agent (either sender or recipient) is waiting for the other agent to respond with a signal before  
proceeding. tUI is an unlimited interlock that has no maximum time value. tMLI is a limited time-out that has a defined minimum. tLI  
is a limited time-out that has a defined maximum.  
*2: 80-conductor cabling shall be required in order to meet setup (tDS, tCS) and hold (tDH, tCH) times in modes greater than 2.  
*3: Timing for tDVS, tDVH, tCVS and tCVH shall be met for lumped capacitive loads of 15 and 40 pf at the connector where all signals (Data and  
STROBE) have the same capacitive load value. Due to reflections on the cable, the measurement of these timings is not valid in a  
normally functioning system.  
*4: For all modes the parameter tZIORDY may be greater than tENV due to the fact that the host has a pull up on IORDY- giving it a known  
state when not actively driven.  
*5: The parameters tDS, and tDH for mode 5 is defined for a recipient at the end of the cable only in a configuration with one device at the  
end of the cable.  
Note:  
All timing measurement switching points (low to high and high to low) shall be taken at 1.5V.  
C141-E218  
5-153  
Interface  
Table 5.30 Ultra DMA sender and recipient timing requirements  
MODE 0 MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
(in ns)  
NAME  
COMMENT  
MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX  
tDSIC  
14.7  
9.7  
4.8  
50.9  
9
6.8  
4.8  
33.9  
9
6.8  
4.8  
22.6  
9
4.8  
4.8  
9.5  
9
2.3  
2.8  
6
Recipient IC data setup time (from  
data valid until STROBE edge)  
(*1)  
tDHIC  
tDVSIC  
tDVHIC  
4.8  
72.9  
9
Recipient IC data hold time (from  
STROBE edge until data may  
become invalid) (*1)  
Sender IC data valid setup time  
(from data valid until STROBE  
edge) (*2)  
6
Sender IC data valid hold time  
(from STROBE edge until data  
may become invalid) (*2)  
*1: The correct data value shall be captured by the recipient given input data with a slew rate of 0.4 V/ns rising and falling and the input  
STROBE with a slew rate of 0.4 V/ns rising and falling at tDSIC and tDHIC timing (as measured through 1.5V).  
*2: The parameters tDVSIC and tDVHIC shall be met for lumped capacitive loads of 15 and 40 pf at the IC where all signals have the same  
capacitive load value. Noise that may couple onto the output signals from external sources in a normally functioning system has not  
been included in these values.  
Note:  
All timing measurement switching points (low to high and high to low) shall be taken at 1.5V.  
5-154  
C141-E218  
5.6 Timing  
5.6.3.3 Sustained Ultra DMA data in burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
t2CYC  
tCYC  
tCYC  
t2CYC  
DSTROBE  
at device  
tDVH  
tDVHIC  
tDVS  
tDVSIC  
tDVH  
tDVHIC  
tDVS  
tDVSIC  
tDVH  
tDVHIC  
DD(15:0)  
at device  
DSTROBE  
at host  
tDH  
tDHIC  
tDH  
tDHIC  
tDH  
tDHIC  
tDS  
tDSIC  
tDS  
tDSIC  
DD(15:0)  
at host  
Note:  
DD (15:0) and DSTROBE signals are shown at both the host and the device  
to emphasize that cable setting time as well as cable propagation delay shall  
not allow the data signals to be considered stable at the host until some time  
after they are driven by the device.  
Figure 5.12 Sustained Ultra DMA data in burst  
C141-E218  
5-155  
Interface  
5.6.3.4 Host pausing an Ultra DMA data in burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
DMARQ  
(device)  
DMACK-  
(host)  
tRP  
STOP  
(host)  
HDMARDY-  
(host)  
tRFS  
DSTROBE  
(device)  
DD(15:0)  
(device)  
Notes:  
1) The host may assert STOP to request termination of the Ultra DMA burst  
no sooner than tRP after HDMARDY- is negated.  
2) After negating HDMARDY-, the host may receive zero, one, two or three  
more data words from the device.  
Figure 5.13 Host pausing an Ultra DMA data in burst  
5-156  
C141-E218  
5.6 Timing  
5.6.3.5 Device terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
DMARQ  
(device)  
tMLI  
DMACK-  
(host)  
tACK  
tLI  
tLI  
STOP  
(host)  
tACK  
tLI  
HDMARDY-  
(host)  
tSS  
tIORDYZ  
DSTROBE  
(device)  
tZAH  
tAZ  
tCVS  
tCVH  
DD(15:0)  
CRC  
tACK  
DA0, DA1, DA2,  
CS0-, CS1-  
Note:  
The definitions for the STOP, HDMARDY- and DSTROBE signal lines are  
no longer in effect after DMARQ and DMACK- are negated.  
Figure 5.14 Device terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
C141-E218  
5-157  
Interface  
5.6.3.6 Host terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
DMARQ  
(device)  
tLI  
tMLI  
DMACK-  
(host)  
tZAH  
tACK  
tAZ  
tRP  
STOP  
(host)  
tACK  
HDMARDY-  
(host)  
tMLI  
tLI  
tRFS  
tIORDYZ  
DSTROBE  
(device)  
tCVS  
tCVH  
DD(15:0)  
CRC  
tACK  
DA0, DA1, DA2,  
CS0, CS1  
Note:  
The definitions for the STOP, HDMARDY- and DSTROBE signal lines are  
no longer in effect after DMARQ and DMACK- are negated.  
Figure 5.15 Host terminating an Ultra DMA data in burst  
5-158  
C141-E218  
5.6 Timing  
5.6.3.7 Initiating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
DMARQ  
(device)  
tUI  
DMACK-  
(host)  
tENV  
tACK  
STOP  
(host)  
tLI  
tUI  
tZIORDY  
DDMARDY-  
(device)  
tACK  
HSTROBE  
(host)  
tDZFS  
tDVS  
tDVH  
DD(15:0)  
(host)  
tACK  
DA0, DA1, DA2  
CS0-, CS1-  
Note:  
The definitions for the STOP, DDMARDY- and HSTROBE signal lines are  
not in effect until DMARQ and DMACK- are asserted.  
Figure 5.16 Initiating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
C141-E218  
5-159  
Interface  
5.6.3.8 Sustained Ultra DMA data out burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
t2CYC  
tCYC  
tCYC  
t2CYC  
HSTROBE  
at host  
tDVH  
tDVHIC  
tDVH  
tDVHIC  
tDVH  
tDVS  
tDVSIC  
tDVS  
tDVSIC  
tDVHIC  
DD(15:0)  
at host  
HSTROBE  
at device  
tDH  
tDHIC  
tDS  
tDSIC  
tDH  
tDHIC  
tDS  
tDSIC  
tDH  
tDHIC  
DD(15:0)  
at device  
Note:  
DD (15:0) and HSTROBE signals are shown at both the device and the host  
to emphasize that cable setting time as well as cable propagation delay shall  
not allow the data signals to be considered stable at the device until some  
time after they are driven by the host.  
Figure 5.17 Sustained Ultra DMA data out burst  
5-160  
C141-E218  
5.6 Timing  
5.6.3.9 Device pausing an Ultra DMA data out burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
tRP  
DMARQ  
(device)  
DMACK-  
(host)  
STOP  
(host)  
DDMARDY-  
(device)  
tRFS  
HSTROBE  
(host)  
DD(15:0)  
(host)  
Notes:  
1) The device may negate DMARQ to request termination of the Ultra DMA  
burst no sooner than tRP after DDMARDY- is negated.  
2) After negating DDMARDY-, the device may receive zero, one two or three  
more data words from the host.  
Figure 5.18 Device pausing an Ultra DMA data out burst  
C141-E218  
5-161  
Interface  
5.6.3.10 Host terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
tLI  
DMARQ  
(device)  
tMLI  
DMACK-  
(host)  
tLI  
tACK  
tSS  
STOP  
(host)  
tLI  
tIORDYZ  
DDMARDY-  
(device)  
tACK  
HSTROBE  
(host)  
tCVS  
tCVH  
DD(15:0)  
(host)  
CRC  
tACK  
DA0, DA1, DA2  
CS0-, CS1-  
Note:  
The definitions for the STOP, DDMARDY- and HSTROBE signal lines are  
no longer in effect after DMARQ and DMACK- are negated.  
Figure 5.19 Host terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
5-162  
C141-E218  
5.6 Timing  
5.6.3.11 Device terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
5.6.3.2 contains the values for the timings for each of the Ultra DMA Modes.  
DMARQ  
(device)  
DMACK-  
(host)  
tACK  
tLI  
tMLI  
STOP  
(host)  
tRP  
tIORDYZ  
DDMARDY-  
(device)  
tRFS  
tLI  
tMLI  
tACK  
HSTROBE  
(host)  
tCVS  
tCVH  
DD(15:0)  
(host)  
CRC  
tACK  
DA0, DA1, DA2,  
CS0-, CS1-  
Note:  
The definitions for the STOP, DDMARDY- and HSTROBE signal lines are  
no longer in effect after DMARQ and DMACK- are negated.  
Figure 5.20 Device terminating an Ultra DMA data out burst  
C141-E218  
5-163  
Interface  
5.6.4 Power-on and reset  
Figure 5.21 shows power-on and reset (hardware and software reset) timing.  
(1) Only master device is present  
Clear Reset *1  
Power-on  
tM  
RESET-  
Software reset  
tN  
BSY  
DASP-  
tP  
*1: Reset means including Power-on-Reset, Hardware Reset (RESET-), and Software Reset.  
(2) Master and slave devices are present (2-drives configuration)  
Clear Reset  
[Master device]  
tN  
BSY  
DASP-  
[Slave device]  
BSY  
tQ  
tP  
PDIAG-  
DASP-  
tS  
tR  
Symbol  
Timing parameter  
Pulse width of RESET-  
Min. Max. Unit  
tM  
tN  
tP  
25  
400  
1
µs  
ns  
ms  
s
Time from RESET- negation to BSY set  
Time from RESET- negation to DASP- or DIAG- negation  
Self-diagnostics execution time  
tQ  
tR  
30  
Time from RESET- negation to DASP- assertion (slave  
device)  
400  
ms  
tS  
Duration of DASP- assertion  
31  
s
Figure 5.21 Power-on reset timing  
5-164  
C141-E218  
CHAPTER 6 Operations  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
6.5  
Device Response to the Reset  
Power Save  
Defect Processing  
Read-ahead Cache  
Write Cache  
C141-E218  
6-1  
Operations  
6.1 Device Response to the Reset  
This section describes how the PDIAG- and DASP- signals responds when the  
power of the IDD is turned on or the IDD receives a reset or diagnostic command.  
6.1.1 Response to power-on  
After the master device (device 0) releases its own power-on reset state, the  
master device shall check a DASP- signal for least 500 ms to confirm presence of  
a slave device (device 1). The master device recognizes presence of the slave  
device when it confirms assertion of the DASP- signal. Then, the master device  
checks a PDIAG- signal to see if the slave device has successfully completed the  
power-on diagnostics.  
If the master device cannot confirm assertion of the DASP- signal within 500 ms,  
the master device recognizes that no slave device is connected.  
After the slave device (device 1) releases its own power-on reset state, the slave  
device shall report its presence and the result of power-on diagnostics to the  
master device as described below:  
DASP- signal: Asserted within 450 ms.  
PDIAG- signal: Negated within 1 ms and asserted within 30 seconds.  
The asserted PDIAG-signal is negated 30 seconds after it is asserted if the  
command is not received.  
6-2  
C141-E218  
6.1 Device Response to the Reset  
Power on  
Master device  
Power On Reset-  
Status Reg.  
BSY bit  
Max. 31 sec.  
Checks DASP- for up to  
500 ms.  
If presence of a slave device is  
confirmed, PDIAG- is checked for  
up to 31 seconds.  
Slave device  
Power On Reset-  
BSY bit  
Max. 1 ms.  
PDIAG-  
DASP-  
Max. 30 sec.  
Max. 450 ms.  
Figure 6.1 Response to power-on  
Note: Figure 6.1 has an assumption that the device is kept on the power-off condition for more than  
5 sec before the device power is turned on.  
6.1.2 Response to hardware reset  
Response to RESET- (hardware reset through the interface) is similar to the  
power-on reset.  
Upon receipt of hardware reset, the master device checks a DASP- signal for up to  
500 ms to confirm presence of a slave device. The master device recognizes the  
presence of the slave device when it confirms assertion of the DASP- signal.  
Then the master device checks a PDIAG- signal to see if the slave device has  
successfully completed the self-diagnostics.  
If the master device cannot confirm assertion of the DASP- signal within 450 ms,  
the master device recognizes that no slave device is connected.  
C141-E218  
6-3  
Operations  
After the slave device receives the hardware reset, the slave device shall report its  
presence and the result of the self-diagnostics to the master device as described  
below:  
DASP- signal: Asserted within 450 ms.  
PDIAG- signal: Negated within 1 ms and asserted within 30 seconds.  
The asserted PDIAG-signal is negated 30 seconds after it is asserted if the  
command is not received.  
Reset-  
Master device  
Status Reg.  
BSY bit  
Max. 31 sec.  
If presence of a slave device is  
Checks DASP- for up to  
500 ms.  
confirmed, PDIAG- is checked for  
up to 31 seconds.  
Slave device  
BSY bit  
Max. 1 ms.  
PDIAG-  
DASP-  
Max. 30 sec.  
Max. 450 ms.  
.
Figure 6.2 Response to hardware reset  
Note: Master Device does not check the DASP signal assertion for 2ms upon receipt of hardware  
reset.  
6-4  
C141-E218  
6.1 Device Response to the Reset  
6.1.3 Response to software reset  
The master device does not check the DASP- signal for a software reset. If a  
slave device is present, the master device checks the PDIAG- signal for up to 15  
seconds to see if the slave device has completed the self-diagnosis successfully.  
After the slave device receives the software reset, the slave device shall report its  
presence and the result of the self-diagnostics to the master device as described  
below:  
PDIAG- signal: negated within 1 ms and asserted within 30 seconds  
The asserted PDIAG-signal is negated 30 seconds after it is asserted if the  
command is not received.  
When the IDD is set to a slave device, the IDD asserts the DASP- signal when  
negating the PDIAG- signal.  
X'3F6' Reg.  
X"0C"  
X"00"  
or X"04"  
Master device  
Status Reg.  
BSY bit  
Max. 31 sec.  
If the slave device is preset, PDIAG- is checked for  
up to 31 seconds.  
Slave device  
BSY bit  
Max. 1 ms.  
PDIAG-  
DASP-  
Max. 30 sec.  
Figure 6.3 Response to software reset  
C141-E218  
6-5  
Operations  
6.1.4 Response to diagnostic command  
When the master device receives an EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC  
command and the slave device is present, the master device checks the PDIAG-  
signal for up to 6 seconds to see if the slave device has completed the self-  
diagnosis successfully.  
The master device does not check the DASP- signal.  
After the slave device receives the EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC  
command, it shall report the result of the self-diagnostics to the master device as  
described below:  
PDIAG- signal: negated within 1 ms and asserted within 5 seconds  
The asserted PDIAG-signal is negated 5 seconds after it is asserted if the  
command is not received. If the command is received, the PDIAG-signal is  
negated according to timing at which the command is received.  
When the IDD is set to a slave device, the IDD asserts the DASP- signal when  
negating the PDIAG- signal.  
X'1F7' Reg.  
Write  
Master device  
Status Reg.  
BSY bit  
Max. 6 sec.  
If the slave device is preset, PDIAG- signal is checked for  
up to6 seconds.  
Slave device  
BSY bit  
Max. 1 ms.  
PDIAG-  
DASP-  
Max. 5 sec.  
Figure 6.4 Response to diagnostic command  
6-6  
C141-E218  
6.2 Power Save  
6.2 Power Save  
The host can change the power consumption state of the device by issuing a  
power command to the device.  
6.2.1 Power save mode  
There are five types of power consumption state of the device including active  
mode where all circuits are active.  
Active mode  
Active idle mode  
Low power idle mode  
Standby mode  
Sleep mode  
The device enters the active idle mode by itself. The device also enters the idle  
mode in the same way after power-on sequence is completed. The subsequent  
mode transition changes depending on the APM setting.  
(1) Active mode  
In this mode, all the electric circuit in the device are active or the device is under  
seek, read or write operation.  
A device enters the active mode under the following conditions:  
The media access system is received.  
(2) Active idle mode  
In this mode, circuits on the device are set to power save mode.  
The device enters the Active idle mode under the following conditions:  
After completion of the command execution other than SLEEP and STANDBY  
commands.  
(3) Low power idle mode  
Sets circuits on the device to the power save mode. The heads are disabled in the  
safe state.  
The device enters the low power mode under the following conditions:  
After certain amount of time has elapsed in the active idle state (APM Mode  
0, Mode 1 and Mode 2)  
Upon completion of the power-on sequence  
C141-E218  
6-7  
Operations  
Upon receipt of a hard reset  
Upon receipt of Idle/Idle Intermediate  
(4) Standby mode  
In this mode, the spindle motor has stopped from the low power idle state.  
The device can receive commands through the interface. However if a command  
with disk access is issued, response time to the command under the standby mode  
takes longer than the active, active idle, or low power idle mode because the  
access to the disk medium cannot be made immediately.  
The drive enters the standby mode under the following conditions:  
A STANDBY or STANDBY IMMEDIATE command is issued.  
A certain amount of time has elapsed in the low power idle state. (APM  
Mode 2)  
The time specified by the STANDBY or IDLE command has elapsed after  
completion of the command.  
A reset is issued in the sleep mode.  
When one of following commands is issued, the command is executed normally  
and the device is still stayed in the standby mode.  
Reset (hardware or software)  
STANDBY command  
STANDBY IMMEDIATE command  
INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS command  
CHECK POWER MODE command  
(5) Sleep mode  
The power consumption of the drive is minimal in this mode. The drive enters  
only the standby mode from the sleep mode. The only method to return from the  
standby mode is to execute a software or hardware reset.  
The drive enters the sleep mode under the following condition:  
A SLEEP command is issued.  
In this mode, the device does not accept the command. (It is ignored.)  
6-8  
C141-E218  
6.3 Defect Processing  
6.2.2 Power commands  
The following commands are available as power commands.  
IDLE  
IDLE IMMEDIATE  
STANDBY  
STANDBY IMMEDIATE  
SLEEP  
CHECK POWER MODE  
SET FEATURES (APM setting)  
6.3 Defect Processing  
This device performs alternating processing where the defective sector is  
alternated with the spare area depending on media defect location information.  
The media defect location information is registered in the system space specified  
for the user area according to the format at shipment of the media from the plant.  
6.3.1 Spare area  
The following type of area is prepared as the spare area in user areas:  
1) Spare cylinder for alternate assignment: This cylinder is used during  
automatic alternating processing for defective sector. More than 2000  
sectors/drive.  
C141-E218  
6-9  
Operations  
6.3.2 Alternating processing for defective sectors  
The following two types of technology are used for alternating processing:  
(1) Sector slip processing  
In this method, defective sectors are not used (thereby avoiding the effects of  
defects), and each defective sector is assigned to the next contiguous sector that is  
normal.  
Depending on the format defined at shipment from the plant, this processing is  
performed for defective sectors.  
Figure 6.5 shows an example where sector (physical) 5 with cylinder 0 and head 0  
is defective.  
Sector (physical)  
778  
777  
779  
778  
780  
779  
Defec-  
tive  
sector  
Cylinder 0  
Head 0  
(Not used)  
Note: When an access request for sector 5 is issued, physical sector 6 must be  
accessed instead of physical sector 5.  
Figure 6.5 Sector slip processing  
(2) Track slip processing  
In this method, defective tracks not used (there by avoiding the effects of defects),  
and each defective track is assigned to the next contiguous track that is normal.  
Depending on the format defined at shipment from the plant, this processing is  
performed for defective tracks.  
6-10  
C141-E218  
6.3 Defect Processing  
(3) Automatic alternating processing  
This technology assigns a defective sector to a spare sector of a spare cylinder for  
alternate assignment.  
This device performs automatic alternating processing in the event of any of the  
following errors.  
Automatic alternating processing is attempted for read error recovery by  
reaching the specified retry cycle while a read error retry is in progress.  
Before attempting automatic alternating processing, writing and reading of  
already corrected data is repeated for the sector in which an error occurred. If  
a read error does not occur during this reading operation, automatic  
alternating processing is not performed.  
If error recovery is not successful even if a write fault error retry is executed,  
automatic alternating processing is performed.  
Figure 6.6 shows an example where automatic alternating processing is applied to  
sector (physical) 5 with cylinder 0 and head 0.  
Sector (physical)  
779  
779  
780  
780  
Defec-  
tive  
sector  
Cylinder 0  
Head 0  
(Not used)  
Alternate cylinder 0  
Head 0  
This is assigned to an unassigned sector.  
Already  
assigned  
Notes:  
1. The alternate cylinder is assigned to an inner cylinder in each zone.  
2. When an access request for sector 5 is issued, the sector assigned for  
alternating processing of the alternate cylinder must be accessed instead of  
physical sector 5.  
If an access request for sectors after sector 5 is issued, seek is executed to  
cylinder 0, head 0 in order to continue processing.  
Figure 6.6 Automatic alternating processing  
C141-E218  
6-11  
Operations  
6.4 Read-ahead Cache  
Read-ahead Cache is the function for automatically reading data blocks upon  
completion of the read command in order to read data from disk media and save  
data block on a data buffer.  
If a subsequent command requests reading of the read-ahead data, data on the data  
buffer can be transferred without accessing the disk media. As the result, faster  
data access becomes possible for the host.  
6.4.1 DATA buffer structure  
This device contains a data buffer. This buffer is divided into two areas: one area  
is used for MPU work, and the other is used as a read cache for another command.  
(See Figure 6.7)  
a) 8MB buffer (8,388,608 bytes)  
8,388,608 bytes  
For R/W command  
For MPU work  
7,831,552  
bytes  
557,056  
bytes  
Figure 6.7 Data buffer structure  
The read-ahead operation is done by the following commands.  
READ SECTOR(S) (EXT)  
READ MULTIPLE (EXT)  
READ DMA (EXT)  
READ SECTOR(S) EXT  
READ DMA EXT  
READ MULTIPLE EXT  
6-12  
C141-E218  
6.4 Read-ahead Cache  
6.4.2 Caching operation  
The caching operation is performed only when the commands listed below are  
received. If any of the following data are stored on the data buffer, the data is sent  
to the host system.  
All of the sector data that this command processes.  
A part of the sector data including the start sector, that this command  
processes.  
If part of the data to be processed is stored on the data buffer, the remaining data  
is read from disk media and sent to the host system.  
(1) Commands that are targets of caching  
The commands that are targets of caching are as follows:  
READ SECTOR(s)  
READ MULTIPLE  
READ DMA  
READ SECTOR(s) EXT  
READ DMA EXT  
READ MULTIPLE EXT  
However, if the caching function is prohibited by the SET FEATURES command,  
the caching operation is not performed.  
(2) Data that is a target of caching  
The data that is a target of caching are as follows:  
1) Read-ahead data that is read from disk media and saved to the data buffer  
upon completion of execution of a command that is a target of caching.  
2) Pre-read data that is read from disk media and saved to the data buffer before  
execution of a command that is a target of caching.  
3) Data required by a command that is a target of caching and has been sent to  
the host system one. If the sector data requested by the host has not been  
completely stored in the read cache portion of the buffer, this data does not  
become a target of caching. Also, if sequential hits occur continuously, the  
caching-target data required by the host becomes invalid because that data is  
overwrited by new data.  
(3) Invalidating caching-target data  
Data that is a target of caching on the data buffer is invalidated under the  
following conditions:  
C141-E218  
6-13  
Operations  
1)-1Any command other than the following commands is issued. (All caching-  
target data is invalidated.)  
RECALIBRATE  
IDLE IMMEDIATE  
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
READ BUFFER  
WRITE BUFFER  
SET FEATURES  
SECURITY ERASE UNIT  
READ LOG EXT  
WRITE LOG EXT  
UNSUPPORT COMMAND (INVALID COMMAND)  
1)-2Commands that partially invalidate caching data  
(When data in the buffer or on media is overwritten, the overwritten data is  
invalidated.)  
READ SECTOR (s) / READ MULTIPLE / READ DMA  
READ SECTOR (s) EXT / READ DMA EXT / READ MULTIPLE EXT  
WRITE SECTOR(s) / WRITE MULTIPLE / WRITE DMA  
WRITE SECTOR (s) EXT / WRITE DMA EXT / WRITE MULTIPLE EXT  
WRITE DMA FUA EXT / WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT  
SMART  
2) A hard reset is issued or the power is turned off.  
3) When ICRC (Interface CRC) Error has occurred.  
6-14  
C141-E218  
6.4 Read-ahead Cache  
6.4.3 Using the read segment buffer  
Methods of using the read segment buffer are explained for following situations.  
6.4.3.1 Miss-hit  
In this situations, the top block of read requested data is not stored at all in the  
data buffer. As a result, all of the read requested data is read from disk media.  
1) HAP (host address pointer) and DAP (disk address pointer) are defined in the  
head of the segment allocated from Buffer. (If pre-read is executed, HAP is  
set at the requested data reading position.)  
AP (host address pointer)  
Read segment  
DAP (disk address pointer)  
2) During reading of read requested data, the request data that has already been  
read is sent to the host system.  
Read requested data is  
stored until this point  
HAP  
Read requested data  
Free space  
DAP  
3) When reading of read requested data is completed and transfer of the read  
requested data to the host system is completed, reading of the disk continues  
until a certain amount of data is stored.  
HAP (stop)  
Read requested data  
Read-ahead data  
DAP  
4) The following cache valid data is for the read command that is executed next:  
Cache valid data  
LAST LBA START LBA  
C141-E218  
6-15  
Operations  
6.4.3.2 Sequential hit  
When the read command that is targeted at a sequential address is received after  
execution of the read commands is completed, the read command transmits the  
Read requested data to the host system continuing read-ahead without newly  
allocating the buffer for read.  
1) When the sequential read command is received, HAP is set in the sequential  
address of the last read command, and DAP is set at a present read position as  
it is.  
HAP (host address pointer)  
Read requested data  
Read-ahead data  
Cache valid data  
Free space  
DAP (disk address pointer)  
2) During reading of read requested data, the request data that has already been  
read is sent to the host system.  
HAP (host address pointer)  
Cache valid data  
Free space  
Read requested data  
DAP (disk address pointer)  
3) When reading of read requested data is completed and transfer of the read  
requested data to the host system is completed, the read-ahead operation  
continues until a certain amount of data is stored.  
HAP (host address pointer)  
Read-ahead Free  
Cache valid data  
Read requested data  
data  
space  
DAP (disk address pointer)  
4) The following cache valid data is for the read command that is executed next:  
Cache valid data  
LAST LBA START LBA  
6-16  
C141-E218  
6.4 Read-ahead Cache  
6.4.3.3 Full hit  
In this situation, all read requested data is stored in the data buffer. Transfer of  
the read requested data is started from the location where hit data is stored. For  
data that is a target of caching and remains before a full hit, the data is retained  
when execution of the command is completed. This is done so that a new read-  
ahead operation is not performed. If the full hit command is received during the  
read-ahead operation, a transfer of the read requested data starts while the read-  
ahead operation is in progress.  
1) An example is the state shown below where the previous read command is  
executing sequential reading. First, HAP is set at the location where hit data  
is stored.  
HAP end location of the previous read command  
HAP (It is reset to the hit data location for transfers.)  
HAP  
Cache data  
Full hit data  
Cache data  
DAP  
DAP end location of the previous read command  
2) The read requested data is transferred, and a new read-ahead operation is not  
performed.  
HAP  
(stop)  
Cache data  
Full hit data  
Cache data  
C141-E218  
6-17  
Operations  
6.4.3.4 Partial hit  
In this situation, a part of read requested data including the top sector is stored in  
the data buffer. A transfer of the read requested data starts from the address where  
the data that is hit is stored until the top sector of the read requested data.  
Remaining part of insufficient data is read then.  
An example is a case where a partial hit occurs in cache data, as shown below.  
Cache valid data  
TART LBA  
LAST LBA  
1) HAP is set at the address where partial hit data is stored, and Transfer is  
started.  
HAP (host address pointer)  
Cache valid data  
Partial hit data  
2) DAP and HAP are set at the head of Buffer newly allocated, and insufficient  
data is read.  
HAP (host address pointer)  
Read segment  
DAP (disk address pointer)  
3) When reading the read requested data ends and the transmission of the read  
requested data to the host system ends, the read-ahead operation continues  
until a certain amount of data is stored.  
The method of storing the read-ahead data at Partial hit is the same as the  
Miss hit.  
Cache valid data  
LAST LBA START LBA  
6-18  
C141-E218  
6.5 Write Cache  
6.5 Write Cache  
Write Cache is the function for reducing the command processing time by  
separating command control to disk media from write control to disk media.  
When Write Cache is permitted, the write command can be keep receiving as long  
as the space available for data transfers remains free on the data buffer. Because  
of this function, command processing appears to be completed swiftly from the  
viewpoint of the host. It improves system throughput.  
6.5.1 Cache operation  
(1) Command that are targets of caching  
The Commands that are targets of caching are as follows:  
WRITE SECTOR (S)  
WRITE MULTIPLE  
WRITE DMA  
WRITE SECTOR (S) EXT  
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT  
WRITE DMA EXT  
However, the caching operation is not performed when the caching function is  
prohibited by the SET FEATURES command.  
(2) Invalidation of cached data  
If an error occurs during writing onto media, write processing is repeated up to as  
many times as specified for retry processing. If retry fails for a sector because the  
retry limit is reached, automatic alternate sector processing is executed for the  
sector. If the automatic alternate sector processing fails, the data in the sector for  
which automatic alternate sector processing failed is invalidated without being  
guaranteed.  
If data remains in sectors following a sector for which automatic alternate sector  
processing failed, the data is invalidated without being guaranteed.  
Moreover, when the command (clause 6.4.2(3)) is accepted and HOST CRC Error  
is generated, the caching data is invalidated.  
<Exception>  
If a Reset or command is received while a transfer of one sector of data is in  
progress, data is not written in the sector of the media where the interruption  
occurred, and sectors accepted before interruption occurred is written in the  
medium.  
C141-E218  
6-19  
Operations  
(3) Status report in the event of an error  
The status report concerning an error occurring during writing onto media is  
created when the next command is issued. Where the command reporting the  
error status is not executed, only the error status is reported. Only the status of an  
error that occurs during write processing is reported.  
<Exceptions>  
The error status is not reported in the following case:  
The reset command is received after an error has occurred during writing to  
media.  
Reset processing is performed as usual. The error status that has occurred  
during writing to media is not reported.  
(4) Enabling and disabling  
Enabling and disabling of the Write Cache function can be set only with the SET  
FEATURES command. The setting does not changed even when the error status  
is reported.  
The initial setting is stored in the system area of media. System area information  
is loaded whenever the power is turned on.  
(5) Reset response  
When a reset is received while cached data is stored on the data buffer, data of the  
data buffer is written on the media, and reset processing is then performed. This  
is true for both a hard reset and soft reset.  
(6) Caching function when power supply is turned on.  
The caching function is invalid until Calibration is done after the power supply is  
turned on (about 7 or 8 sec). It is effective in Default after that as long as the  
caching function is not invalidly set by the SET FEATURES command.  
6-20  
C141-E218  
6.5 Write Cache  
If Write Cache is enabled, there is a possibility that data transferred  
from the host with the Write Cache enable command is not  
completely written on disk media before the normal end interrupt is  
issued.  
If an unrecoverable error occurs while multiple commands that are  
targets of write caching are received, the host has difficulty  
determining which command caused the error. (An error report is  
not issued to the host if automatic alternating processing for the  
error is performed normally.) Therefore, the host cannot execute a  
retry for the unrecoverable error while Write Cache is enabled. Be  
very careful on this point when using this function.  
If a write error occurs, an abort response is sent to all subsequent  
commands.  
C141-E218  
6-21  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Glossary  
Actuator  
AT bus  
Head positioning assembly. The actuator consists of a voice coil motor and head  
arm. If positions the read-write (R-W) head.  
A bus between the host CPU and adapter board  
ATA (AT Attachment) standard  
The ATA standard is for a PC AT interface regulated to establish compatibility  
between products manufactured by different vendors. Interfaces based on this  
standard are called ATA interfaces.  
BIOS standard for drives  
The BIOS standard collectively refers to the parameters defined by the host,  
which, for example, include the number of cylinders, the number of heads, and  
the number of sectors per track in the drive. The physical specifications of the  
drive do not always correspond to these parameters.  
The BIOS of a PC AT cannot make full use of the physical specifications of these  
drivers. To make the best use of these drives, a BIOS that can handle the standard  
parameters of these drives is required.  
Command  
Data block  
DE  
Commands are instructions to input data to and output data from a drive.  
Commands are written in command registers.  
A data block is the unit used to transfer data. A data block normally indicates a  
single sector.  
Disk enclosure. The DE includes the disks, built-in spindle motor, actuator,  
heads, and air filter. The DE is sealed to protect these components from dust.  
Master (Device 0)  
The master is the first drive that can operate on the AT bus. The master is daisy-  
chained with the second drive which can operate in conformity with the ATA  
standard.  
C141-E218  
GL-1  
Glossary  
MTBF  
Mean time between failures. The MTBF is calculated by dividing the total  
operation time (total power-on time) by the number of failures in the disk drive  
during operation.  
MTTR  
Mean time to repair. The MTTR is the average time required for a service person  
to diagnose and repair a faulty drive.  
PIO (Programmed input-output)  
Mode to transfer data under control of the host CPU  
Positioning  
Sum of the seek time and mean rotational delay  
Power save mode  
The power save modes are idle mode, standby mode, and sleep mode.  
In idle mode, the drive is neither reading, writing, nor seeking data. In standby  
mode, the spindle motor is stopped and circuits other than the interface control  
circuit are sleeping. The drive enters sleep mode when the host issues the SLEEP  
command.  
Reserved  
Reserved bits, bytes, and fields are set to zero and unusable because they are  
reserved for future standards.  
Rotational delay  
Time delay due to disk rotation. The mean delay is the time required for half a  
disk rotation. The mean delay is the average time required for a head to reach a  
sector after the head is positioned on a track.  
Seek time  
The seek time is the time required for a head to move from the current track to  
another track. The seek time does not include the mean rotational delay.  
Slave (Device 1)  
The slave is a second drive that can operate on the AT bus. The slave is daisy-  
chained with the first drive operating in conformity with the ATA standard.  
GL-2  
C141-E218  
Glossary  
Status  
VCM  
The status is a piece of one-byte information posted from the drive to the host  
when command execution is ended. The status indicates the command  
termination state.  
Voice coil motor. The voice coil motor is excited by one or more magnets. In  
this drive, the VCM is used to position the heads accurately and quickly.  
C141-E218  
GL-3  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Acronyms and Abbreviations  
A
I
ABRT Aborted command  
AIC Automatic idle control  
AMNF Address mark not found  
ATA AT attachment  
IDNF  
ID not found  
IRQ14 Interrupt request 14  
L
AWG American wire gage  
LED  
MB  
Light emitting diode  
B
M
BBK  
Bad block detected  
Mega-byte  
BIOS  
Basic input-output system  
MB/S Mega-byte per seconds  
MPU  
Micro processor unit  
C
P
CORR Corrected data  
CH  
CL  
CM  
CSR  
CSS  
CY  
Cylinder high register  
PCA  
PIO  
Printed circuit assembly  
Programmed input-output  
Cylinder low register  
Command register  
Current sense register  
Current start/stop  
R
RLL  
Run-length-limited  
Cylinder register  
RoHS The Restrictions of the use of  
certain Hazardous Substances in  
electrical and electronic equipment  
D
dBA  
DE  
DH  
dB A-scale weighting  
Disk enclosure  
Device/head register  
S
SA  
SC  
SG  
SN  
ST  
System area  
Sector count register  
Signal ground  
Sector number register  
Status register  
DRDY Drive ready  
DRQ  
DSC  
DWF  
Data request bit  
Drive seek complete  
Drive write fault  
E
T
ECC  
ER  
ERR  
EU  
Error checking and correction  
Error register  
Error  
TPI  
Track per inches  
TRONF Track 0 not found  
Typ  
Typical  
European Union  
U
F
UNC  
VCM  
Uncorrectable ECC error  
FR  
Feature register  
V
H
Voice coil motor  
HA  
Host adapter  
HDD  
Hard disk drive  
C141-E218  
AB-1  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Index  
1 drive connection ..................................... 2-3  
2 drives configuration................................ 2-4  
2 drives connection.................................... 2-4  
8MB buffer.............................................. 6-12  
caching operation.....................................6-13  
CHECK POWER MODE ................ 5-39, 6-9  
CHECK POWER MODE command .........6-8  
check sum .............................5-51, 5-54, 5-55  
circuit configuration........................... 4-3, 4-5  
command block register.............................5-8  
command code and parameter ...... 5-14, 5-15,  
5-16, 5-127, 5-128  
A
A/D converter circuit............................... 4-11  
AAM........................................................ 5-92  
acceleration mode.................................... 4-19  
acoustic noise ............................................ 1-9  
acoustic noise specification....................... 1-9  
active idle mode......................................... 6-7  
active mode................................................ 6-7  
actuator...............................................2-2, 4-2  
actuator motor control ............................. 4-18  
adaptability................................................ 1-2  
advanced power management................. 1-12,  
1-13, 5-91  
AGC circuit ............................................. 4-10  
air circulation system................................. 2-2  
air filter...................................................... 4-3  
alternate status register ............................ 5-13  
alternating processing  
for defective sector............................... 6-10  
ambient temperature.................................. 3-6  
APM ...............................................1-12, 5-91  
ATA interface............................................ 2-3  
attribute ID .............................................. 5-47  
attribute value for the worst case so  
far......................................................... 5-48  
automatic acoustic management.............. 5-92  
automatic alternating processing............. 6-11  
average positioning time............................ 1-2  
command data structure...........................5-54  
command description...............................5-18  
command processing during self-  
calibration...............................................4-8  
command protocol .................................5-129  
command register.....................................5-13  
command that are targets of caching .......6-19  
command without data transfer..............5-134  
command, target of caching.....................6-13  
compact......................................................1-2  
compensating open loop gain.....................4-7  
connection to ATA interface......................1-3  
contents of security password................5-101  
contents of SECURITY SET  
PASSWORD data ................................5-93  
control block register ...............................5-13  
controller circuit................................. 2-3, 4-4  
CSEL setting............................................3-13  
current and power dissipation....................1-7  
current attribute value..............................5-48  
current fluctuation (Typ.) at +5 V  
when power is turned on ........................1-8  
current LBA under test ............................5-56  
current requirements and power  
dissipation ..............................................1-7  
current span under test .............................5-56  
cylinder high register ...............................5-10  
cylinder low register ................................5-10  
B
blower........................................................ 4-3  
burst even1 .............................................. 4-17  
burst even2 .............................................. 4-17  
burst odd.................................................. 4-17  
D
D/A converter (DAC) ..............................4-13  
data area...................................................4-15  
data assurance in the event of power  
failure ...................................................1-10  
data buffer..................................................1-3  
DATA buffer structure.............................6-12  
data format of SMART  
C
cable connection...............................3-9, 3-10  
cable connector specification .................. 3-10  
cache operation........................................ 6-19  
caching function when power supply  
comprehensive error log.......................5-54  
is turned on. ......................................... 6-20  
C141-E218  
IN-1  
Index  
data format of SMART summary  
error register...............................................5-8  
error reporting condition ........... 5-112, 5-118,  
5-126  
example of model name and product  
number....................................................1-5  
EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC ......5-28  
execution example of READ  
error log................................................5-53  
data format version number.....................5-47  
data register................................................5-8  
data transfer mode....................................5-90  
data, target of caching..............................6-13  
data-surface servo format ........................4-15  
defect processing .......................................6-9  
description .................................5-110, 5-111,  
5-112, 5-113, 5-114, 5-116, 5-117,  
MULTIPLE command .........................5-63  
execution timing of self-calibration ...........4-8  
5-118, 5-120, 5-121, 5-122, 5-124,  
F
5-125, 5-126  
factory default setting...............................3-12  
failure prediction capability flag..............5-50  
feature.........................................................1-2  
feature flag ...............................................5-57  
feature register............................................5-9  
feature register value (subcommand)  
device configuration ...........................2-1, 2-2  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION.................5-58  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
FREEZE LOCK...................................5-59  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
IDENTIFY...........................................5-59  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
and function.......................5-42, 5-43, 5-44  
feature register value and settable  
IDENTIFY data structure.....................5-61  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
mode.....................................................5-89  
FIR circuit ................................................4-11  
FLUSH CACHE ......................................5-74  
FLUSH CACHE EXT............................5-126  
format of device attribute value data........5-46  
format of insurance failure threshold  
value data..............................................5-46  
FR = 01h ................................................5-105  
FR = 02h ................................................5-106  
FR = 03h ................................................5-107  
FR = 04h ................................................5-108  
FR = C0h..................................................5-59  
FR = C1h..................................................5-59  
FR = C2h..................................................5-59  
FR = C3h..................................................5-59  
frame ..........................................................3-4  
frequency characteristic of  
RESTORE............................................5-59  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION SET.........5-59  
device connection ....................................3-10  
device connector........................................3-9  
device control register..............................5-14  
device overview.........................................1-1  
device pausing Ultra DMA data  
out burst..............................................5-161  
device response to reset .............................6-2  
device specification ...................................1-4  
device terminating ultra DMA data  
out burst..............................................5-163  
device terminating Ultra DMA data  
in burst ...............................................5-157  
out burst..............................................5-163  
device/head register .................................5-11  
diagnostic code ........................................5-28  
digital PLL circuit....................................4-11  
dimension...................................................3-2  
disk......................................................2-2, 4-2  
disk drive outer view .................................2-2  
DMA data transfer command ................5-135  
DOWNLOAD MICROCODE.................5-31  
driver circuit ............................................4-14  
programmable filter..............................4-10  
full hit.......................................................6-17  
function and performance ..........................1-2  
G
gray code..................................................4-17  
green product..............................................1-2  
H
E
handling caution................................. 3-7, 3-8  
head............................................................2-2  
high resistance against shock .....................1-3  
high-speed transfer rate..............................1-2  
host command ..........................................5-14  
host pausing ultra DMA data  
enabling and disabling, write cache.........6-20  
environmental specification.......................1-8  
error correction and retry by ECC .............1-3  
error data structure...................................5-54  
error logging capability............................5-51  
error posting...........................................5-127  
error rate ..................................................1-11  
in burst................................................5-156  
IN-2  
C141-E218  
Index  
host terminating ultra DMA data  
in burst ............................................... 5-158  
out burst ............................................. 5-162  
miss-hit.....................................................6-15  
model and product number ........................1-5  
mounting....................................................3-3  
mounting frame structure...........................3-4  
multiword data transfer..........................5-150  
multiword DMA data transfer timing ....5-150  
I
I/O register................................................. 5-7  
IDENTIFY DEVICE............................... 5-76  
IDENTIFY DEVICE DMA..................... 5-77  
IDLE.................................................5-37, 6-9  
IDLE IMMEDIATE.........................5-34, 6-9  
Information to be read by IDENTIFY  
N
normal DMA data transfer.....................5-136  
O
DEVICE command.....................5-78, 5-79  
INITIALIZE DEVICE  
PARAMETERS................................... 5-30  
INITIALIZE DEVICE  
PARAMETERS command .................... 6-8  
initiating Ultra DMA data  
in burst ....................................5-138, 5-151  
out burst ..................................5-143, 5-159  
inner guard band...................................... 4-15  
input voltage.............................................. 1-6  
installation condition................................. 3-1  
insurance failure threshold ...................... 5-51  
interface..............................................1-3, 5-1  
interface signal .......................................... 5-2  
invalidating caching-target data .............. 6-13  
invalidation of cached data...................... 6-19  
off-line data collection capability ............5-50  
off-line data collection status......... 5-48, 5-49  
operation ....................................................6-1  
operation of DOWNLOAD  
MICROCODE......................................5-32  
operation to move head to reference  
cylinder.................................................4-18  
orientation..................................................3-3  
other command ......................................5-135  
outer guard band ......................................4-15  
outline ........................................................4-2  
overview.................................................5-137  
P
PAD .........................................................4-17  
partial hit..................................................6-18  
pausing Ultra DMA data  
J
in burst................................................5-139  
out burst..............................................5-144  
phases of operation ................................5-138  
physical interface.......................................5-2  
physical sector servo configuration  
jumper location........................................ 3-11  
jumper setting.......................................... 3-11  
jumper setting of master or slave  
drive..................................................... 3-12  
on disk surface......................................4-16  
PIO data transfer....................................5-149  
PIO data transfer timing.........................5-149  
PIO data transferring command from  
device to host......................................5-129  
PIO data transferring command from  
host to device......................................5-132  
positioning error.......................................1-11  
power amplifier........................................4-13  
power command.........................................6-9  
power on/off sequence...............................1-8  
power requirement.....................................1-6  
power save .................................................6-7  
power save mode ............................... 1-2, 6-7  
power supply configuration .......................4-4  
power supply connector (CN1)................3-11  
power up in standby setting .....................3-14  
power-on and reset.................................5-164  
power-on sequence ....................................4-6  
programmable filter circuit ......................4-10  
L
large capacity............................................. 1-2  
limitation of mounting............................... 3-4  
load/unload function................................ 1-11  
location of breather.................................... 3-5  
location of setting jumper........................ 3-11  
log directory data format ......................... 5-51  
logical Interface......................................... 5-6  
low noise and vibration ............................. 1-2  
low power idle mode................................. 6-7  
M
master drive-slave drive setting............... 3-12  
master/slave............................................... 1-3  
mean time between failure (MTBF)........ 1-10  
mean time to repair (MTTR)................... 1-10  
media defect ............................................ 1-11  
microprocessor unit (MPU)..................... 4-13  
C141-E218  
IN-3  
Index  
protocol for command abort ..................5-131  
protocol for the command execution  
SECURITY UNLOCK ............................5-95  
SEEK........................................................5-27  
seek operation ..........................................4-18  
selective self-test feature flag...................5-57  
selective self-test log data structure .........5-56  
selective self-test pending time................5-57  
self-calibration ...........................................4-7  
self-calibration content...............................4-7  
self-diagnosis .............................................1-3  
self-test execution status ................ 5-49, 5-55  
self-test index...........................................5-55  
self-test number........................................5-55  
sensing and compensating for  
without data transfer...........................5-135  
R
raw attribute value ...................................5-48  
READ BUFFER ......................................5-73  
read circuit...............................................4-10  
READ DMA............................................5-69  
READ DMA (EXT).................................6-12  
READ DMA EXT .................................5-111  
READ DMA EXT ...................................6-12  
READ LOG EXT ..................................5-114  
READ MULTIPLE..................................5-63  
READ MULTIPLE (EXT) ......................6-12  
READ MULTIPLE EXT..............5-113, 6-12  
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS.......5-103  
READ NATIVE MAX ADDRESS  
external force..........................................4-7  
sequential hit ............................................6-16  
series termination required for ultra  
DMA...................................................5-148  
service area.................................................3-7  
service life................................................1-10  
servo burst capture circuit........................4-13  
servo circuit................................................4-3  
servo control.............................................4-12  
servo control circuit .................................4-12  
servo frame format...................................4-17  
servo mark................................................4-17  
SET FEATURES ............................. 5-89, 6-9  
SET MAX ..............................................5-104  
SET MAX ADDRESS...........................5-104  
SET MAX ADDRESS EXT ..................5-118  
SET MAX FREEZE LOCK...................5-108  
SET MAX LOCK ..................................5-106  
SET MAX SET PASSWORD ...............5-105  
SET MAX UNLOCK.............................5-107  
SET MULTIPLE MODE.........................5-67  
shock and vibration....................................1-9  
shock and vibration specification...............1-9  
signal assignment on the connector............5-3  
SLEEP.............................................. 5-40, 6-9  
sleep mode..................................................6-8  
SMART....................................................5-41  
SMART error logging..............................5-52  
SMART self-test ......................................5-55  
SMART self-test log data format.............5-55  
spare area....................................................6-9  
specification ...............................................1-4  
specification summary ...............................1-4  
spindle........................................................4-2  
spindle motor..............................................2-2  
spindle motor control ...............................4-19  
spindle motor control circuit....................4-13  
spindle motor driver circuit........................4-3  
stable rotation mode.................................4-19  
STANDBY....................................... 5-36, 6-9  
STANDBY command................................6-8  
EXT....................................................5-112  
READ SECTOR(S) .................................5-21  
READ SECTOR(S) (EXT)......................6-12  
READ SECTOR(S) COMMAND  
protocol ..............................................5-130  
READ SECTOR(S) EXT .............5-110, 6-12  
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S)..................5-26  
READ VERIFY SECTOR(S) EXT.......5-124  
read/write circuit......................... 2-3, 4-3, 4-9  
read/write circuit block diagram................4-9  
read/write preamplifier (PreAMP).............4-9  
read-ahead cache......................................6-12  
read-ahead cache system............................1-3  
RECALIBRATE......................................5-20  
recommended series termination for  
ultra DMA..........................................5-148  
reliability..................................................1-10  
reset............................................................6-8  
reset response...........................................6-20  
response to  
diagnostic command ..............................6-6  
hardware reset .................................6-3, 6-4  
power-on .........................................6-2, 6-3  
software reset .........................................6-5  
ripple..........................................................1-6  
S
sector count register...................................5-9  
sector number register..............................5-10  
sector slip processing...............................6-10  
SECURITY DISABLE PASSWORD ...5-101  
SECURITY ERASE PREPARE..............5-97  
SECURITY ERASE UNIT......................5-98  
SECURITY FREEZE LOCK ..................5-99  
SECURITY SET PASSWORD...............5-93  
IN-4  
C141-E218  
Index  
STANDBY IMMEDIATE ...............5-33, 6-9  
STANDBY IMMEDIATE command........ 6-8  
standby mode............................................. 6-8  
start mode ................................................ 4-19  
status........................................................ 5-54  
status flag................................................. 5-48  
status register........................................... 5-11  
status report in event of error................... 6-20  
subassembly............................................... 4-2  
surface temperature measurement  
ultra DMA data transfer.........................5-151  
ultra DMA feature set ............................5-137  
ultra DMA sender and recipient  
timing requirement.............................5-154  
ultra DMA termination with pull-up  
or pull-down.......................................5-148  
unload feature ..........................................5-34  
UNLOAD IMMEDIATE.........................5-34  
unrecoverable read error ..........................1-11  
using read segment buffer........................6-15  
point....................................................... 3-6  
sustained Ultra DMA data  
V
in burst ............................................... 5-155  
out burst ............................................. 5-160  
system configuration ................................. 2-3  
VCM current sense resistor (CSR) ..........4-14  
viterbi detection circuit ............................4-11  
W
T
wide temperature range..............................1-2  
WRITE MULTIPLE FUA EXT ........5-125  
WRITE BUFFER.....................................5-75  
write cache....................................... 1-3, 6-19  
write circuit................................................4-9  
WRITE DMA ..........................................5-71  
WRITE DMA EXT................................5-117  
WRITE DMA FUA EXT.......................5-121  
WRITE LOG EXT.................................5-122  
WRITE MULTIPLE................................5-65  
WRITE MULTIPLE EXT .....................5-120  
write precompensation...............................4-9  
WRITE SECTOR(S)................................5-23  
WRITE SECTOR(S) command  
terminating ultra DMA data  
in burst ............................................... 5-140  
out burst ............................................. 5-145  
test span................................................... 5-56  
the data  
in transfer........................................... 5-139  
out transfer......................................... 5-144  
theory of device operation......................... 4-1  
timing..................................................... 5-149  
total number of drive error ...................... 5-54  
track following operation ........................ 4-18  
track slip processing................................ 6-10  
U
protocol ..............................................5-133  
WRITE SECTOR(S) EXT.....................5-116  
WRITE VERIFY .....................................5-25  
write/read recovery ..................................4-17  
ultra DMA CRC rule............................. 5-147  
ultra DMA data  
in command ....................................... 5-138  
out command ..................................... 5-143  
ultra DMA data burst timing  
requirement........................................ 5-152  
C141-E218  
IN-5  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
Comment Form  
We would appreciate your comments and suggestions regarding this manual.  
Manual code  
Manual name  
C141-E218-01EN  
MHV2120AT, MHV2100AT, MHV2080AT, MHV2060AT, MHV2040AT  
DISK DRIVE PRODUCT MANUAL  
Please mark each item: E(Excellent), G(Good), F(Fair), P(Poor).  
General appearance  
Technical level  
Organization  
Clarity  
(
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
Illustration  
Glossary  
Acronyms & Abbreviations  
Index  
(
(
(
(
)
)
)
)
Accuracy  
Comments & Suggestions  
List any errors or suggestions for improvement.  
Page  
Line  
Contents  
Please send this form to the address below. We will use your comments in planning future editions.  
Address: Fujitsu Learning Media Limited  
37-10 Nishikamata 7-chome  
Oota-ku  
Tokyo 144-0051  
JAPAN  
Fax: 81-3-3730-3702  
Organization:  
Name:  
C141-E218-01EN  
This page is intentionally left blank.  
MHV2120AT, MHV2100AT, MHV2080AT, MHV2060AT, MHV2040AT  
DISK DRIVE PRODUCT MANUAL  
C141-E218-01EN  
MHV2120AT, MHV2100AT, MHV2080AT, MHV2060AT, MHV2040AT  
DISK DRIVE PRODUCT MANUAL  
C141-E218-01EN  
This page is intentionally left blank  

Iomega EN55022 User Manual
Huawei Technologies Cell Phone U8510 User Manual
Hitachi Deskstar 180GXP User Manual
Fujitsu Embedded MegaRAID SATA CA97232 0014 01EN User Manual
FieldServer FS 8700 105 User Manual
Clarion DCZ625 User Manual
Bloomfield 8574 User Manual
Black &amp; Decker DCM18 Series User Manual
Audiovox PPC 4100 User Manual
ABB ARR600 User Manual